4. 逐释分的注释巴利
4. Paṭiniddesavāravaṇṇanā
1. 教说理趣分别的注释巴利
1. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
5 “随义之想”是指想与义相应、随义而行的状态;也就是说,“教说理趣”这个想是随义的,是随义而行的,这就是它的含义。巴利
5.Anvatthasaññatanti atthānugatasaññabhāvaṃ, ‘‘desanāhāro’’ti ayaṃ saññā anvatthā atthānugatāti attho.
“未说”就是指先前没有解释过的词句。为了说明“我为你们说法……”这段话的关联,所以说了“那么在哪里……”等话。因为《导论》这部论书的特征,正是注释三藏佛语;而三藏佛语一旦在涵摄教法的经句中被当作应予注释的对象来把握,便已经是被把握了的。因此他说“通过教说理趣……展示”等等。巴利
Avuttamevāti pubbe asaṃvaṇṇitapadameva. ‘‘Dhammaṃ vo’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.420) vacanassa sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kattha panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tepiṭakassa hi buddhavacanassa saṃvaṇṇanālakkhaṇaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ, tañca pariyattidhammasaṅgāhake suttapade saṃvaṇṇetabbabhāvena gahite gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘desanāhārena…pe… dassetī’’ti.
对于“以分析乐味等为特征的教说理趣”这一项,它们在偈颂中,以及在这里所引的“乐味、过患……”等文中,为了以例证的方式加以分析,便开始了“其中,什么是乐味”等论述。这里的“其中”,是指在那一首“乐味、过患性”的偈颂中所说的“什么是乐味”。或者也可以说:在这里,“乐味、过患……”等文所列举的乐味当中,“什么是这里的乐味”——这就是它的意思。其余的也按同样的方式理解。为了说明两种乐味——即作用与目的不同、所缘与能缘不同为特征的两种乐味——举出了两首偈颂作为例子;同样,为了说明两种过患——即以欲爱变异为特征和以轮回之苦为特征——也举出了两首偈颂;为了说明两种出离——“圣道与涅槃”——也各举两首偈颂来作例示和说明。巴利
Yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ vibhajanalakkhaṇo desanāhāro, te gāthāya, idhāpi ca āgate ‘‘assādaṃ ādīnava’’ntiādinā udāharaṇavasena vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’ti gāthāyaṃ vutto katamo assādo. Atha vā ‘‘assādaṃ ādīnava’’ntiādinā yo idha assādādīnaṃ uddeso, tattha katamo assādoti ceti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Kammakaraṇatthabhinnassa visayavisayitālakkhaṇassa assādadvayassa nidassanatthaṃ gāthādvayudāharaṇaṃ, tathā kāmavipariṇāmalakkhaṇassa, vaṭṭadukkhalakkhaṇassa cāti duvidhassāpi ādīnavassa nidassanatthaṃ ‘‘ariyamaggo nibbāna’’nti duvidhassāpi nissaraṇassa nidassananidassanatthañca dve dve gāthā udāhaṭā.
“法确实守护行法的人”这句话里,行法的人能得到圣道、圣果和涅槃所带来的格外守护;不过,即使已经获得福报成就,也会因为无常和行苦等而被视为恶趣——出于这个用意,所以说“没有提到出离”。因为他接下来会说:“以涅槃为依据,一切再生都是恶趣。”巴利
Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacārinti (jā. 1.10.102-103; netti. 5, 26, 31; peṭako. 22) ettha dhammacārino maggaphalanibbānehi sātisayārakkhā sambhavati, sampattibhavassāpi vipariṇāmasaṅkhāradukkhatāhi duggatibhāvo icchitovāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘nissaraṇaṃ anāmasitvā’’ti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nibbānaṃ vā upanidhāya sabbā upapattiyo duggatī’’ti.
“应观察”是一种教示方式。而关于这种观察的运作方式、所缘和作者,是通过“空、世间、摩卡拉迦”这三个词来说明的,所以他说“空……敕令”等。其中,诸行的空,可以是因为它们无我的本性,也可以是因为自我是空。由于它们不受支配、缺乏自我的实质,由于它们无我、空虚、自体空无,由此便显示了这两方面,即“不受支配”等。如此便成为超越死亡者:意思是,通过这样的修行,就能成为超越死亡的人。为超越死亡而施设与教导的前行方法,通过宣说现前成就的殊胜之果,所以说道“他所得到的……果”等。巴利
Avekkhassūti vidhānaṃ. Tassā pana avekkhāya pavattiākāro, visayo, kattā ca ‘‘suññato, lokaṃ, mogharājā’’ti padattayena vuttāti āha – ‘‘suññato…pe… āṇattī’’ti. Tattha saṅkhārānaṃ suññatā anattasabhāvatāya, attasuññatāya ca siyā. Yato te na vasavattino, attasāravirahitā ca, yato te anattā, rittā, tucchā ca attanā, tadubhayaṃ dasseti ‘‘avasavattitā’’tiādinā. Evaṃ maccutaro siyāti evaṃ paṭipattiyā maccutaro bhaveyyāti attho. Parikappetvā vidhiyamānassa maccutaraṇassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā desanāya paccakkhato sijjhamānaṃ sātisayaṃ phalanti āha ‘‘tassa yaṃ…pe… phala’’nti.
6 “以举例的方式”就是指通过实例来说明。其中,“按照人的类别”这句话,是在说明:世尊针对乐味等所作的不同开示,是根据“略开慧者”等不同类别的人而施设的。巴利
6.Udāharaṇavasenāti nidassanavasena. Tattha ‘‘puggalavibhāgenā’’ti iminā ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalapayojito assādādīsu bhagavato desanāvisesoti dasseti.
所谓“只是刚接触到的程度”,是指仅藉由耳门而被意门识的相续所缘取的那一程度。所谓“具有常见等相”,是指具有常见和断见的相。这两种见解必须靠说法才能动摇,随顺忍或如实智是动摇不了它们的。在这四者当中,意趣是共通的。关于这一点也曾经说过:巴利
Ghaṭitamattanti sotadvārānusārena manodvārikaviññāṇasantānena ālambitamattaṃ. Sassatādiākārassāti sassatucchedākārassa. Idañhi dvayaṃ dhammadesanāya cāletabbaṃ, na anulomikakhanti, yathābhūtañāṇaṃ vā. Etasmiñhi catukke āsayasāmaññatā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 常见与断见,以及随顺忍;
如实了知的那个智,这被称为‘意乐’。”巴利
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaññita’’nti. (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.136; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā, verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);
动摇是指镇伏。随他转是指断除。开显时了知,所以叫开显即知者,这个构词应依词根分解等方式来理解。至于广说,如日月天子运行不规则等经文那样,是中性概念的说明,所以注疏说缓慢、渐渐。出离、过患与出离、乐味与过患与出离的说明,能够调伏三类所化者。巴利
Calanāyāti vikkhambhanāya. Parānuvattiyāti samucchedanāya. Ugghaṭite jānātīti ugghaṭitaññūti mūlavibhujādipakkhepena saddasiddhi veditabbā. Vipañcitanti ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya bhāvanapuṃsakaniddesoti āha ‘‘mandaṃ saṇika’’nti. Nissaraṇaādīnavanissaraṇaassādādīnavanissaraṇānaṃ vibhāvanā veneyyattayavinayanasamatthā.
“四种”是指:乐味、过患、乐味与过患、乐味与出离,这些就是四种。如果只要说明出离就足以调伏所化者,那为什么不取第五种呢?回答说:“因为未说过‘过患’。”如果这个道理是针对略说即知者而说的,那么单靠出离就够了。如果是针对广说即知者,或者是需要引导的人,那就应该说“过患与出离”,或者“乐味、过患与出离”才对啊?但因为没有那样宣说的缘故,所以不取第五种。因此才说“由于未说过‘过患’”等等。“教说”是先笼统地把握,再特别指明为“经里某一部分或一首偈颂”。这里不取“仅得文句者”,是因为他还没有触及那带有方便善巧的真正出离。巴利
Cattāroti assādo ca ādīnavo ca assādo ādīnavo ca assādo nissaraṇañcāti ete cattāro. Yadi nissaraṇavibhāvanā veneyyavinayanasamatthā, kasmā pañcamo na gahitoti āha ‘‘ādīnavāvacanato’’ti. Yadi hi ugghaṭitaññuṃ sandhāya ayaṃ nayo vuccati, nissaraṇamattena siddhaṃ siyā. Atha vipañcitaññuṃ, neyyaṃ vā, ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca assādo ca ādīnavo nissaraṇañca vattabbo siyā? Tathā appavattattā na gahito. Tenāha ‘‘ādīnavāvacanato’’tiādi. Desananti sāmaññato gahitaṃ ‘‘suttekadesaṃ gāthaṃ vā’’ti viseseti. Padaparamaaggahaṇañcettha saupāyassa nissaraṇassa anāmaṭṭhattā.
“善”是指可爱的果报,“恶”是指不可爱的果报,所以说“这是乐味,这是过患”。利养等属于福德的果报,因此是随顺它们而说“这是乐味”。反过来,失去利养等则有过患,应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇa’’nti iminā iṭṭhavipāko, ‘‘pāpaka’’nti aniṭṭhavipāko adhippetoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ assādo, ayaṃ ādīnavo’’ti. Lābhādīnaṃ puññaphalattā tadanurodhaṃ vā sandhāya ‘‘ayaṃ assādo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tabbipariyāyena alābhādīnaṃ ādīnavatā veditabbā.
所谓“欲”,是指和烦恼欲相伴的感官对象之欲。“以不端正之相”,就是以不合宜的方式。“扰乱”,就是压迫、搅乱。“我已出家”,就是我已经进入出家状态。“真实无谬”,就是不会出差错的。“沙门性”,就是沙门的身份。只有止息罪恶的状态,才是更好、更殊胜的。巴利
Kāmāti kilesakāmasahitā vatthukāmā. Virūparūpenāti appatirūpākārena. Mathentīti maddanti. Pabbajitomhīti pabbajjaṃ upagato amhi. Apaṇṇakanti avirajjhanakaṃ. Sāmaññanti samaṇabhāvo. Samitapāpabhāvoyeva seyyo sundarataro.
在这里,“欲确实种种多样、甜美、令人愉悦”,这是它的乐味;“以不正之相扰乱心”,这是它的过患;“真实无谬的沙门性”,这是它的出离。因此说:“此……中略……以及出离。”巴利
Tattha ‘‘kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā’’ti ayaṃ assādo, ‘‘virūparūpena mathenti citta’’nti ayaṃ ādīnavo, ‘‘apaṇṇakaṃ sāmañña’’nti idaṃ nissaraṇanti āha ‘‘ayaṃ…pe… nissaraṇañcā’’ti.
因为经中已经用一法门和三法门列举了果等,所以这里说“也以二法门”。巴利
Phalādīnaṃ ekakavasena ca tikavasena ca pāḷiyaṃ udāhaṭattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dukavasenapī’’ti.
乐行道与苦行道这两种行道,每一种又因迟钝通达和快速通达而各有两种,因此说“依行道与通达所作的区分,即依行道而作的区分”。对于已完成前期准备的人,在地遍等所缘中最初生起的“地……”这样的作意,即是第一作意。近行,指的是近行定。禅那因为是应当修行的道,所以也称为“行道”。与更低的智相比,其余更高的智则称为“通达”。巴利
Sukhā paṭipadā, dukkhā paṭipadāti yā dve paṭipadā, tāsu ekekā dandhakhippābhiññatāya dve dve hontīti āha ‘‘paṭipadābhiññākato vibhāgo paṭipadākato hotī’’ti. Katapubbakiccassa pathavīkasiṇādīsu sabbapaṭhamaṃ ‘‘pathavī’’tiādinā pavattamanasikāro paṭhamasamannāhāro. Upacāranti upacārajjhānaṃ. Paṭipajjitabbatāya jhānampi ‘‘paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Tadaññā heṭṭhimapaññato adhikā paññāti katvā ‘‘abhiññā’’ti vuccati.
“烦恼”是指盖的种种类型,以及和它们一起生起的烦恼。“诸支显现”是指获得寻等禅支。巴利
Kileseti nīvaraṇappakāre, taṃsahagatakilese ca. Aṅgapātubhāvanti vitakkādijhānaṅgapaṭilābhaṃ.
“执取”就是安立。“把握色与无色”就是以特相等方式简别、把握色法和无色法。有人问:已经把握了色与无色的人,道显现得迟缓,这可能是由于确定名色等很困难吧?难道不应该仅仅因为“把握色与无色很困难”就说它是苦行道吗?不是的。即使确定名色等因为对立烦恼微薄而容易成就,但由于与这种成就相应的观之诸根迟钝,道仍然显现得迟缓。所以,即使能毫无困难地把握色与无色,若是把握起来很困难,那就更不必说了。其余几种情况也照这样理解。“确定名色”就是如理确定:“这仅仅是名和色,没有别的什么众生之类。”那么,这里哪一种情况才算合理呢?在“一次、两次、数百次”等镇伏的层次中,一次、两次的镇伏还是乐行道,超过这个就不是乐行道了,所以应当知道,从第三次镇伏开始就是苦行道。另外,在观诸行聚的终点,生灭随观现前时,因为要对观随烦恼作三次镇伏,困难很大,应当知道这就是苦行道。在这里,由于行道迟缓,即使这个人本身并不困难,但因为前面那些项很困难,也仍然按照前面说的道理,说他是苦行道。然而,如果有人在一切处都无困难,那就应当知道这是达到最上等的乐行道。巴利
Abhinivisantoti paṭṭhapento. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggaṇhantoti rūpārūpadhamme lakkhaṇādīhi paricchinditvā gaṇhanto. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa maggapātubhāvadandhatā ca nāmarūpavavatthānādīnaṃ kicchasiddhiyā siyāti na rūpārūpapariggahakicchatāya eva dukkhāpaṭipadatā vattabbāti ce? Na, nāmarūpavavatthāpanādīnaṃ paccanīkakilesamandatāya sukhasiddhiyampi tathāsiddhavipassanāsahagatānaṃ indriyānaṃ mandatāya maggapātubhāvato. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvāti akicchenapi pariggahetvā, kicchena pariggahite vattabbameva natthi. Evaṃ sesesupi. Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthāpentoti ‘‘nāmarūpamattametaṃ, na añño koci sattādiko’’ti vavatthāpanaṃ karonto. Kataro panettha vāro yuttarūpoti? Yo koci sakiṃ, dvikkhattuṃ, anekasatakkhattunti evamādīsu hi vikkhambhanavāresu sakiṃ, dvikkhattuñca vikkhambhanavāro sukhā paṭipadā eva, na tato uddhaṃ sukhā paṭipadā hoti, tasmā tikkhattuṃ vikkhambhanavārato paṭṭhāya dukkhā paṭipadā veditabbā. Apica kalāpasammasanāvasāne udayabbayānupassanāya uppannassa vipassanupakkilesassa tikkhattuṃ vikkhambhanena kicchatāvāro dukkhā paṭipadā veditabbā. Ettha dandhattā paṭipadāya etassa akicchattepi purimānaṃ kicchatte dukkhāpaṭipadatā vuttanayāva. Yassa pana sabbattha akicchatā, tassa paramukkaṃsagatā sukhā paṭipadā veditabbā.
就像因为把握名色这件事很困难、道的生起很迟钝,所以说是苦行道、迟通达;反过来就是第四种;按照两者混合的情况,应当知道第二和第三种。为了说明这一点,说“以此……应当了知”。因为这里指的是从轮回之苦中出离,所以说了“这确实只是属于观的部分”。巴利
Yathā nāmarūpapariggahakicchatāya maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā vuttā, tathā tabbipariyāyena catutthī, tadubhayavomissatāvasena dutiyā, tatiyā ca ñātabbāti dassento āha ‘‘iminā…pe… veditabbā’’ti. Vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānassa adhippetattā ‘‘vipassanāpakkhikā evā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在“因、方法、果”这一句里,贪行性和钝慧是第一种行道的因,贪行性和利慧是第二种行道的因,见行性和钝慧是第三种行道的因,见行性和利慧是第四种行道的因。至于方法,则依次是念、定、精进、慧这些根,以及作为亲依止缘的念处、禅那、正勤和谛。果,就是从轮回之苦中出离。巴利
Hetupāyaphalehīti ettha taṇhācaritatā, mandapaññatā ca paṭhamāya paṭipadāya hetu, taṇhācaritatā, udatthapaññatā ca dutiyāya, diṭṭhicaritatā, mandapaññatā ca tatiyāya, diṭṭhicaritatā, udatthapaññatā ca catutthiyā. Upāyo pana yathākkamaṃ satisamādhivīriyapaññindriyāni , satipaṭṭhānajhānasammappadhānasaccāni ca upanissayabhūtāni. Phalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānaṃ.
“以定为门”是指以定为门来修行。因此他说“以止为先行的观”。“这里”是指在《导论》这部书中。他将说“由离贪而心解脱,是有学果”,以及“由离贪而心解脱,是超越欲界”。这里的“他”指不来者。巴利
Samādhimukhenāti samādhimukhena bhāvanānuyogena. Tenevāha ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāyā’’ti. Idhāti imasmiṃ nettippakaraṇe. Vakkhati ‘‘rāgavirāgā cetovimutti sekkhaphala’’nti, ‘‘rāgavirāgā cetovimuttikāmadhātusamatikkama’’nti ca. Soti anāgāmī.
“由彼”是指由对治的一方。“从那”是指从对治方面。把“心解脱”等词按同一依格的方式组成复合词之后,为了按不同依格的方式来说明,所以说了“或者”等话。接着又通过“心的……或者”等说法,以另一个词的含义来显示“心解脱”等词的复合关系。由于用“识”的同义词“心”来套用那种连接方式并不成立,所以他说“随其所应”。巴利
Tenāti paṭipakkhena. Tatoti paṭipakkhato. Samānādhikaraṇavasena ca cetovimuttisaddānaṃ samāsaṃ katvā bhinnādhikaraṇavasena vattuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Puna ‘‘cetaso vā’’tiādinā aññapadatthavasena cetovimuttipadānaṃ samāsaṃ dasseti. Viññāṇapariyāyena ceto-saddena vuttayojanā na sambhavatīti āha ‘‘yathāsambhava’’nti.
hā这个字的意思是“去”,而这里指的是“智的去向”,所以说“hātabbā”就是“应当去到”。“netabbā”就是“应当被了知”。巴利
Hā-saddo gatiattho, gati cettha ñāṇagati adhippetāti āha ‘‘hātabbāti gametabbā’’ti. Netabbāti ñāpetabbā.
7 所谓“彼”,是指对补特伽罗的分类。“以智分别”,是指按闻所成智等智慧的类别来区分。“生起”,就是产生。“于彼”,是指在那个属于略知者等补特伽罗分类的开示划分之中。“于开示中”,就是在经里。“为显示彼”,是为了显示那种补特伽罗的分类。有些人读作:“那么,这个理趣是怎样成立的?”巴利
7.Tanti puggalavibhāgaṃ. Ñāṇavibhāgenāti sutamayādiñāṇappabhedena. Nibbattananti uppādanaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ugghaṭitaññutātiādipuggalavibhāgabhūte desanābhājane. Desanāyanti sutte. Taṃ dassetunti taṃ puggalavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ. ‘‘Svāyaṃ hāro kathaṃ sambhavatī’’ti keci paṭhanti.
对前面所说那类法义的审察慧。从“职责”方面说,就是从“导师开示法”等职责来说。从“能力”方面说,就是从能调伏略知者等所化众生的能力来说。在“教法的受持”这一句里,也要把“从职责或从能力”引过来配合理解。巴利
Sāti vuttappakāradhammatthānaṃ vīmaṃsanapaññā. Adhikāratoti ‘‘satthā vā dhammaṃ desayatī’’tiādiadhikārato. Sāmatthiyato ugghaṭitaññuādiveneyyavinayanasamatthabhāvato. Pariyattidhammassa upadhāraṇanti etthāpi ‘‘adhikārato sāmatthiyato vā’’ti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.
按第一种分别来说,是以审察等理趣为伴随的;按第二种分别来说,是具备审察等分类的;由作为因的思惟所生起,就是思所成慧。依照这样所说的理路,就可以加以配合,因此他说:其余部分,就是按照已说的方式。巴利
‘‘Vīmaṃsādipariyāyavatī paṭhamavikappavasena, vīmaṃsādivibhāgavatī dutiyavikappavasena, cintāya hetubhūtāya nibbattā cintāmayī’’ti evamādivuttanayānusārena sakkā yojetunti āha ‘‘sesaṃ vuttanayamevā’’ti.
在“闻思所成慧”这一说法中,应当理解为:闻所成慧、思所成慧,以及闻思所成慧这三者,是用一部分来代替整体的省略说法。因为大菩萨正是安住在思所成慧上,在最后一生中才开始修观;而其他的人则是在闻思所成慧上。所谓“以他们”,是指那些这样诵读的人。所谓“依照所说的方式”,是指在论述修行方法的行道论中,按照“把握所造色,把握非色”等所说的方式。巴利
Sutacintāmayañāṇesūti sutamayañāṇe ca cintāmayañāṇe ca sutacintāmayañāṇesu ca sutacintāmayañāṇesūti ekadesasarūpekaseso veditabbo. Cintāmayañāṇeyeva hi patiṭṭhitā mahābodhisattā carimabhave vipassanaṃ ārabhanti, itare sutacintāmayañāṇesūti. Tehīti tathā paṭhantehi. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, arūpaṃ pariggaṇhātī’’tiādinā paṭipadākathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttanayena.
8 8. 意思是:他人的音声是生起此智的缘。关于“由自身生起的如理作意”这一句,应当知道它是按回转的方式,转过来成为第二个缘。这样一来,就把弟子们修所成慧的生起也包含在内了。或者,这里所说的正是弟子智的生起,因为文中谈到了略知者等的分类。在这个说法下,应当看到前文所说的省略表达方式已被否定。通过“由于希求、加行与觉了已经成就”这一句,显示是就属于后二轮、被先前之因所包含的闻所成慧和思所成慧而说“这两种慧存在”。应当知道,这些慧的存在,是因为没有被对立面所逼迫,因为没有加以审察,因为没有造作,也因为闻所成慧先前已经成就。巴利
8. Parato ghoso paccayabhūto etissāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Paccattasamuṭṭhitena ca yonisomanasikārenā’’ti idaṃ āvuttinayena dutiyaṃ āvaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Tena sāvakānaṃ bhāvanāmayañāṇuppatti saṅgahitā hoti. Sāvakānameva vā ñāṇuppatti idhādhippetā ugghaṭitaññuādivibhāgakathanato. Etasmiṃ pakkhe pubbe vuttaekasesanayopi paṭikkhitto daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Āsayapayogapabodhassa nipphāditattā’’ti etena pacchimacakkadvayapariyāpannāni pubbahetusaṅgahāni sutacintāmayañāṇāni sandhāya ‘‘imā dve paññā atthī’’ti vuttanti dasseti. Atthibhāvo cetāsaṃ paṭipakkhena anupaddutatā veditabbā. Aparikkhatattā anabhisaṅkhatattā. Sutamayañāṇassāpi purimasiddhassa.
9 以教说、行道、智的区分来说:就是依出离教说等教说的区分,依苦行道等行道的区分,依闻所成智等智的区分。巴利
9.Desanāpaṭipadāñāṇavibhāgehīti nissaraṇadesanādidesanāvibhāgehi, dukkhāpaṭipadādipaṭipadāvibhāgehi, sutamayañāṇādiñāṇavibhāgehi.
“以其余的会众”是指属于刹帝利、居士会众的。“八种”是指刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四天王众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众这八种会众。巴利
Avasiṭṭhapārisajjenāti khattiyagahapatiparisapariyāpannena. Aṭṭhannanti khattiyaparisā brāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisāti imāsaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ.
因为它有能力,所以它做了有效的关联。巴利
Samatthetīti samatthaṃ sambandhatthaṃ karoti.
把“那十二支的状态”阐明出来,这就是它们的关联。所谓“其义”,指的是六六理趣的含义。因为六六理趣统摄了一切教法,而它的含义又被《转法轮经》所涵盖,所以说“阐明一切……令其开显”。这是就能境而言论文词,就所境而言论义理,说它们的关联,因此说“这些……的关联状态”。巴利
Tameva dvādasapadabhāvaṃ dīpetvāti sambandho. Tadatthassāti chachakkapariyāyatthassa (ma. ni. 3.420 ādayo). Sabbapariyattidhammasaṅgāhakattā chachakkapariyāyassa, tadatthassa ca dhammacakkappavattena suttena (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) saṅgahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbassāpi…pe… vibhāvento’’ti. Visayibhāvena byañjanapadānaṃ, visayabhāvena atthapadānaṃ sambandhaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… sambandhabhāva’’nti.
词的组成部分是字母。“词义”就是词义的组成部分。“执取词义”是指对词义的理解。“差别施设”是指差别的产生。“语句差别”是指在语句的特别之处。“令心喜悦”就是令心满足。“智慧磨砺”是指以智慧磨砺、使其变得锐利。由于用词等也能加以开显,“以多种语句为所缘”这一点也能成立。因为如果只以单一语句为所缘,那么对义与词的开显等就只能依次以字母等为所缘,这样就会成为一种固定的限制。“以此”是指义与词以多种语句为所缘这一含义。巴利
Padāvayavo akkharāni. Padatthoti padatthāvayavo. Padatthaggahaṇassāti padatthāvabodhassa. Visesādhānaṃ visesuppatti. Vākyabhedeti vākyavisese. Cittaparitosanaṃ cittārādhanaṃ. Buddhinisānaṃ paññāya tejanaṃ tikkhabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Nānāvākyavisayatāpi siddhā hoti padādīhipi saṅkāsanassa siddhattā . Ekavākyavisayatāya hi atthapadānaṃ saṅkāsanādayo yathākkamaṃ akkharādivisayā evāti niyamo siyā. Etenāti atthapadānaṃ nānāvākyavisayatthena.
以开显等为含义,指的是开显、分析、引导和作用。巴利
Ugghaṭanādiatthānīti ugghaṭanavipañcananayanappayojanāni.
10 “站立于此”就是upaṭṭhita。为了说明upaṭṭhita这个词有处格的含义,所以说了“站立之处”,就像“padakkanta”那样。因此他说“这是他们……”等等。“以行道、教说、到达”:就是行道的到达和教说的到达。经中从“这个世间确实陷入了困境,有生……乃至……老死”等开始,从老死入手,以缘起为门径,深入观照。就像为了砍掉大片丛林而在磨刀石上磨斧头一样,世间的救护者为了砍断烦恼的丛林而磨利智慧之斧。他因为证得佛果的善因已经圆满成熟,为了证得一切知智,就持续不断地修习观照。在修行过程中,他反复进入各种禅定,依照随观法的方式,审察种种行相、种种形态的有为法。这时他所生起的、以三十六万亿种方式运行的智慧,被称为“大金刚智”。不过义注里提到“以二十四万亿禅定运行的大金刚智”,那是指日常运行的禅定,以及那些前引智和后随智。至于后面将要说的“以智金刚击碎无明之网”,那应当理解为与观智一起生起的道智。“这就是梵行”:指的是教法梵行,为了说明这一点,才接着说了“梵天神的……”等等。巴利
10. Upatiṭṭhati etthāti upaṭṭhitanti upaṭṭhitasaddassa adhikaraṇatthataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upatiṭṭhanaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘padakkanta’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ nesa’’ntiādi. Paṭipattidesanāgamanehīti paṭipattigamanadesanāgamanehi. ‘‘Kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca…pe… jarāmaraṇassā’’tiādinā jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisitvā mahāgahanaṃ chindituṃ nisānasilāyaṃ pharasuṃ nisento viya kilesagahanaṃ chindituṃ lokanātho ñāṇapharasuṃ tejento buddhabhāvāya hetusampattiyā paripākagatattā sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamāya vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpento antarantarā nānāsamāpattiyo samāpajjitvā anupadadhammavipassanāvasena anekākāravokārasaṅkhāre sammasanto chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena yaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattesi, taṃ ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vadanti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇa’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.141) āgataṃ, taṃ devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattīnaṃ purecarānucarañāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘ñāṇavajiramohajālapadālana’’nti, taṃ saha vipassanāya maggañāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Etaṃ brahmacariyanti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ adhippetanti taṃ dassento ‘‘brahmuno’’tiādimāha.
“以教说”这个词在这里是具格,表示手段或方式。“已连结”在这里,显示的是原因之义已内含其中,所以说“择出之后而结合”。巴利
Desanāyāti karaṇatthe idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Niyuttoti ettha hetuattho antonītoti dassento ‘‘niddhāretvā yojito’’ti āha.
2. 抉择理趣分别的注释巴利
2. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
11 应当从词性、特征、时间、语态、格、数等方面的差别出发,从语音的角度对词进行分析。在这里,正在做这种分析时,只有按照语言本身如实自然的方式来做,才算做得好。为了说明这一点,先说了“这个名词……这个是从语音上对词的分析”,然后又说“然而这个……”等。所谓“应阐述之义的解释”,就是说明各个词所应表达的意义的种种差别,并用各种方式加以展开、讲清楚。巴利
11. Jātiliṅgakālasādhanavibhattisaṅkhyāvisesādito saddato padavicayo kātabbo. Tattha kariyamāno ca yathāsabhāvaniruttiyā eva kato sukato hotīti dassento ‘‘idaṃ nāmapadaṃ…pe… ayaṃ saddato padavicayo’’ti vatvā ‘‘so panāya’’ntiādimāha. Vattabbaatthasaṃvaṇṇanāti taṃtaṃpadavacanīyassa atthassa bhedaṃ vatvā pariyāyehi vivaritvā kathanaṃ.
正在被审察的经句,指的是以提问方式出现的经句。有人说“经中的句子也都是以提问方式出现的”,但并非所有经句都是这样。同一个词可以有好几种含义,把这些含义提取出来,就叫“义的提取”。反过来,同一个含义可以由好几个词来表达,把这些词提取出来,就叫“词的提取”。因为在对整部经作注释时,所能找到的一切意义都属于词义。
所谓“九种经”,意思是把经、应颂等九种类型的经典拿来审察、思择——应该这样理解。或者也可以说:以“审察”这一理趣,对经、应颂等所有九种类型的经典进行审察——这就是它的含义。因此才说“经、应颂等”。巴利
Viciyamānassa suttapadassāti pucchāvasena pavattasuttapadassa. ‘‘Suttantarapadānipi pucchāvaseneva pavattānī’’ti vadanti ‘‘na sabbampi suttapada’’nti. Ekasseva padassa sambhavantānaṃ anekesaṃ atthānaṃ uddhāro atthuddhāro. Ekasseva pana atthassa sambhavantānaṃ anekesaṃ padānaṃ uddhāro paduddhāro. Sabbe hi saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte labbhamāne sabbe padatthe. Nava suttanteti suttageyyādivasena navappakāre suttasmiṃ ānetvā vicinatīti yojanā. Atha vā ‘‘sabbe nava suttante’’ti iminā pavicayalakkhaṇena hārena suttageyyādīni sabbānipi navappakārāni suttāni vicinatīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘suttageyyādike’’tiādi.
“憍萨罗国人从前可爱”等开头的五十六首偈,是事偈。而“Pārāyanamanugāyissaṃ”等开头的十九首偈,是随颂偈。这个名字名为“彼岸道”。因此说道:“这些法能使人到达彼岸,所以这个法门就名为‘彼岸道’。”所谓“在智慧中转动”,是说具寿玛哈咖佳亚那在解说这个抉择理趣分别的时候,把在自己智慧中现前运转的内容这样说了出来——应当这样连贯理解。巴利
‘‘Kosalānaṃ purā rammā’’tiādikā (su. ni. 982) chapaññāsa gāthā vatthugāthā. ‘‘Pārāyanamanugāyissa’’nti (su. ni. 1137 ādayo) pana ādikā ekūnavīsati gāthā anugītigāthā. Idaṃ nāmaṃ katanti idaṃ ‘‘pārāyana’’nti nāmaṃ kataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pāraṃ gamanīyā ime dhammā, tasmā imassa dhammapariyāyassa ‘pārāyanantveva adhivacana’’’nti (su. ni. pārāyanatthutigāthā; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthā 149 ādayo). Buddhiyaṃ viparivattamānanti imassa vicayahāravibhaṅgassa desanākāle āyasmā mahākaccāno attano buddhiyaṃ vattamānaṃ katvā evamāhāti yojanā.
对于“一分记说”这个词,应当以一分的方式作答,所以叫“一分记说”;或者说,因为应当以一分的方式加以回答,所以叫“一分记说”,意思是适合以一分记说的方式来处理。剩下两个词也是同样的道理。“应搁置”是指因为应当被搁置,所以不应作答,这就是它的意思。有人因为对其他时机的熟悉,而对遮止之法生起疑惑,为了断疑而发问,所以说“断疑”。不过,如果一个人本来就不了解遮止之法,是出于想要知道而发问,那也可能算是“未见照明”的问。正如后面将会说到的:“不了解世间的遮止等”。巴利
Ekaṃsabyākaraṇassa ayanti ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā, ekaṃsena vā byākātabbattā ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā, ekaṃsabyākaraṇayoggāti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ṭhapanīyāti ṭhapetabbattā abyākaraṇīyāti attho. Samayantaraparicayena nivāraṇadhammaṃ pati saṃsayapakkhando pucchatīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vimaticchedana’’nti. Pakatiyā pana nivāraṇadhammaṃ ajānanto ñātukāmatāya pucchatīti adiṭṭhajotanāya pucchāpi siyā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘lokassa nivāraṇādīni ajānantenā’’ti.
因执取单一所表之义,故称为“一事物摄”。巴利
Ekavatthupariggahāti ekassa abhidheyyatthassa gahaṇato.
令解脱成熟的诸根,是指安住于还灭这一方的信等诸法。那么,在这里,圣者们是否也以“根的世间”而被统摄呢?因此说道:“以所摄法的力量”等等。巴利
Vimuttiparipācakaindriyāni vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitassa saddhādayo dhammā, kiṃ panettha ariyānampi indriyalokena saṅgaho hotīti āha ‘‘pariyāpannadhammavasenā’’tiādi.
以黑半月的第十四日、茂密的森林丛、云层遮蔽和半夜这四支具足来说明。vivicchā即是疑(vicikicchā),所以称它为疑之因。在“苦为其大恐怖”这一句中,所提到的assa一词,应联系“渴爱的黏着,我说为assa”来理解,因此解释道:“渴爱即是此世间的assa。”接着,借“一切众生”等语与“一切漏”等语,分别从顺向、逆向两方面,显示无明尤能成为障碍。又以“远方诸善人得以显耀(《法句》304;《义释》11)”“染著者不明了意义(《义释》11,27)”这两首偈颂,显示随颂观察,应如此连接理解。巴利
Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalacchādanaaḍḍharattīnaṃ vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatena. Vivicchāti vicikicchāya. Tenāha ‘‘vicikicchāhetū’’ti. Dukkhamassa mahabbhayanti ettha vuttaṃ ‘‘assā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘jappābhilepanaṃ assa brūmī’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbanti dassento ‘‘jappā taṇhā assa lokassā’’ti āha. ‘‘Sabbasattāna’’ntiādinā, ‘‘sabbasovā’’tiādinā ca anvayato, byatirekato ca sātisayaṃ avijjāya nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Dūre santo pakāsanti (dha. pa. 304; netti. 11), ratto atthaṃ na jānātī’’ti (netti. 11, 27) gāthādvayenāpi anugītivicayaṃ dassetīti yojetabbaṃ.
色界众生,就是“色界”一词所指。这是为了说明从变坏苦中解脱的原因,所以这样连接。因为要从轮回之苦中解脱,而那轮回之苦,是以无余穷尽的方式被行苦所涵盖的。巴利
Rūpāvacarāti rūpāvacarasattā. Vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanassa kāraṇavacananti sambandho. Yato vaṭṭadukkhato muccanaṃ. Taṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ anavasesapariyādānavasena saṅkhāradukkhatāgahaṇena.
“一依”是指以单一事物为依止。因为所问的涉及两层含义——镇伏、遮蔽和断除,所以论中说“为了显示多依”。因此说“称为遮止的抑制……被遮蔽、被切断”。它的意思是:“请讲说称为遮止的镇伏、抑制与遮蔽。”巴利
Ekādhāranti ekavatthu adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Nivāraṇaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ pidhānaṃ samucchedoti atthadvayassa pucchitattā ‘‘anekādhāraṃ dassetu’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ…pe… pidhiyyanti pacchijjantī’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.1041; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 3). Tassattho ‘‘nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ, saṃvaraṃ, pidhānañca kathehī’’ti.
“vodāna”一词,以此指诸流的镇伏清净;“vuṭṭhāna”一词,以此指断除清净。因此,为了阐明所问的双重含义,才说了“eva”等语。同样地,也这样说:“vodāyati……中略……圣道。”巴利
‘‘Vodāna’’nti iminā sotānaṃ vikkhambhanavisuddhi, ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā samucchedavisuddhi adhippetāti āha ‘‘pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ ‘eva’ntiādi vutta’’nti. Tathā cāha ‘‘vodāyati…pe… ariyamaggo’’ti.
见流、慢流、无明流也跟随渴爱流,所以说“大多数情况下是以随顺的方式”。所谓“以近行之力”,是指以所依的近行之力。所谓“从一切”,是指从眼门一直到意门的一切门。所谓“以一切方式”,是指以渴爱、邪执、高举等种种方式。巴利
Diṭṭhimānāvijjāsotāpi taṇhāsotānugāti āha ‘‘yebhuyyena anurodhavasenā’’ti. Upacāravasenāti nissitupacāravasena. Sabbasmāti cakkhuto yāva manatoti sabbasmā dvārato. Sabbappakārenātti taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena.
在道之前的前行阶段,为了镇伏诸流而说的那种念,就是这里的“那念”。在道刹那,我说这就是对诸流的防护和关闭。不过,因为在道刹那,能关闭的念也随顺于慧,而在这里慧的作用更为突出,所以才说“它们由慧而关闭”。巴利
Tameva satinti yāyaṃ sati pubbabhāge sotānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena vuttā, tameva satiṃ. Maggakkhaṇe sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ pidhānaṃ brūmi. Yasmā pana pidhāyikāpi sati maggakkhaṇe paññānugā, paññākiccamevettha adhikaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti.
在“防护与关闭”这里,“防护”这个词指的是制止。巴利
Saṃvarapidhānānanti ettha saṃvarasaddena nivāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
在还没有证得任何圣道的时候,会有某种有行识可能生起;一旦证得了那个圣道,那种识就以不再生起的方式灭掉,同时连同与它相应的名色一起灭掉。所以经文说“由于那种那种识的灭尽,连同一起……”。这里说的“灭”指的是不再生起的灭,因为这里指的是无余涅槃。以这个来连接,所以叫“连结”,这里问的就是这个意思。巴利
Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ariyamagge anadhigate yaṃ yaṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ uppajjanārahaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ adhigate taṃ taṃ viññāṇaṃ anuppādanirodhena nirujjhati saddhiṃ attanā sampayuttanāmarūpenāti āha ‘‘tassa tassa viññāṇassa nirodhena sahevā’’ti. Anuppādanirodho hi ettha ‘‘nirodho’’ti adhippeto anupādisesanibbānassa adhippetattāti. Anusandhīyati etenāti anusandhi, idha pucchiyamāno attho.
在这里,“与境一同显示”的意思是:四谛本身就是境。具有应断性质的是集谛,它的境是苦谛。正如经中所说:“比丘们,对结所系法住于随观乐味时,渴爱便会增长。”具有能断性质的是道谛,它的境是灭谛。因此说“与境一同……于诸谛中”。这里虽然一开始说“集谛在二地中被断”,但实际适用的只是“由见道断三结,由修道断七结”这样的分别说明,所以说“以能断的分别作为门径,来显示应断的分别”。巴利
Sahavisayena dassetunti ettha saccāni eva visayo. Pahātabbasabhāvaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tassa visayo dukkhasaccaṃ. ‘‘Saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.53, 57) hi vuttaṃ. Pahāyakasabhāvaṃ maggasaccaṃ, tassa visayo nirodhasaccanti āha ‘‘saha visayena…pe… saccesū’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘samudayo dvīsu bhūmīsu pahīyatī’’ti āraddhaṃ, ‘‘dassanena tīṇi saṃyojanāni pahīyanti, bhāvanāya satta saṃyojanāni pahīyantī’’ti pana vibhāgavacanameva vattanti āha ‘‘pahāyakavibhāgamukhena pahātabbavibhāgaṃ dassetu’’nti.
无余的欲贪和嗔恚由第三道断除,其余的则由第四道断除,所以说“其余的则无余断除”。其中,所谓“在那三界、三有之中”,是指按业与异熟轮转的分类所说的三界、三有。所谓“就结而言”,是指从一切时都存在的连结力和束缚力来说的。巴利
Niravasesakāmarāgabyāpādā tatiyamaggena pahīyanti, itare catutthamaggenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘itarehi pana niravasesa’’nti. Tatthāti kammavipākavaṭṭappabhedena tedhātuke bhavattaye. Saṃyojanavasenāti sabbadā yojanavasena bandhanavasena.
12 即使只是一种智,但它是最高的果智,又以彼相之灭尽与不生起为所缘的省察智之力,依“果”的惯用说法,也得到两个名称。巴利
12. Aggaphalañāṇatāya ekampi samānaṃ tannimittassa khayānuppādārammaṇassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa vasena phalavohārena dve nāmāni labhati.
喜悦之名的获得,就是依据这个所缘的标示;为了阐明这个意思,所以说“于尽……乃至……假立”。巴利
Somanassanāmalābho iminā ārammaṇasaṅketenāti tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘khaye…pe… samaññāyā’’ti āha.
13 仅以那摄受来说,就是指仅以触为第五支与五色根的摄受。以俱生等来说,就是指以俱生、无间等缘的方式,以及依止、所缘等方式。以“相应”一词,这里指的是与之俱存、没有差别,因此说“是指无差别地可被摄受的状态”。巴利
13.Taggahaṇenevāti phassapañcamakapañcarūpindriyaggahaṇeneva. Sahacaraṇādināti sahajātādianantarādipaccayabhāvena ceva nissayārammaṇādinā ca. ‘‘Sampayutta’’nti iminā sahitatā avisiṭṭhatā idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘avibhāgena gahaṇīyabhāvaṃ sandhāyā’’ti.
怎么生起定根呢?回答说:这里说的“以念摄”,指的是断除缠烦恼。因为靠定确实不可能断除缠烦恼。巴利
Kathaṃ samādhindriyaṃ uppādetīti āha ‘‘satiggahaṇena cettha pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ idhādhippeta’’nti. Na hi samādhinā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ sambhavati.
通过它而精勤,所以叫精勤,也就是精进力。那些是指精进行。一味:就像诸根是一味的,同样以一味性而随念、而转起。对于如此转起的精进,瑜伽行者应当这样思惟:确实很好地运用了精进。因此,以随顺运用精进的含义,称为赞扬。所以这样说:于我如是……中略……因性故。巴利
Padahati etenāti padhānaṃ, vīriyaṃ. Teti vīriyasaṅkhārā. Ekarasenāti yathā indriyāni ekarasāni honti, evaṃ ekarasabhāvena saraṇato pavattanato. Tathā pavattiyā eva suṭṭhu vata vīriyaṃ vāhesīti yoginā saṅkappetabbato tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena ‘‘sampahaṃsanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ me…pe… hetubhāvato’’ti.
“神足”这个词,第一种是主动义,第二种是工具义;而“足”这个词,只有工具义。所说的“应当成就的神足”,并不是“正在成就”。应当成就的神足,与作为成就工具的“足”,并不同指一个东西,那怎么能说“按第一种含义,神足本身就是足”呢?同样,通过神通的运作而应当证得的、被称为智慧的成就,与通过成就的运作而应当成就的,这两种工具义并不同指一个东西,那怎么能说“按第二种含义,是神足的足”呢?——这是可以的,因为“足”作为正在成就的那一部分,正是成就工具的途径。或者,可以这样连接:“按第一种含义,是神足的足;按第二种含义,神足本身就是足,即神足。”为什么?在这里,按近因的道理,邻近的含义被理解为“第一种”,而更靠前的含义则是“第二种”。巴利
Iddhisaddassa paṭhamo kattuattho, dutiyo karaṇattho vutto, pādasaddassa eko karaṇattho eva. Pajjitabbā ca iddhī vuttā, na ca ijjhanti. Pajjitabbā ca iddhī pajjanakaraṇena pādena samānādhikaraṇā na hontīti ‘‘paṭhamena atthena iddhi eva pādo’’ti kathaṃ sakkā vattuṃ, tathā iddhikiriyākaraṇena sādhetabbā buddhisaṅkhātā iddhi pajjanakiriyākaraṇena pajjitabbāti dvinnaṃ karaṇānaṃ na samānādhikaraṇatā sambhavatīti ‘‘dutiyena atthena iddhiyā pādo’’ti kathaṃ sakkā vattunti ce? Sakkā, pādassa ijjhamānakoṭṭhāsa ijjhanakaraṇūpāyabhāvato. Atha vā ‘‘paṭhamena atthena iddhiyā pādo, dutiyena atthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo’’ti evaṃ yojanato. Kathaṃ? Anantarattho paccāsattiñāyena idha paṭhamoti adhippeto, tato purimo dutiyoti.
“如果比丘以欲为增上而获得定……”(《分别论》432)这样说到,因此,所谓“修习具足欲定、精勤行的神足”,在这里也是把“欲增上”和“定”合起来说成“欲定”,省略了“增上”这个词,构成复合词,由此可以知道。不过,正是为了显示“增上”这个词的含义,《破迷论》(《分别论注》431)中说:“以欲为因的定,或者以欲为增上的定。”所以,在这里也应当理解为:“欲定”就是“欲增上定”。接着,为了说明那个欲,按照前面所说的方式,以信为首,所以说“信增上的心一境性”。或者说“这是精勤”,指的是精进。与“精进”这个词相应,用单数来说,因为意指四种精进以及应当生起的诸法之区分,所以说“这些行”。因此,应当知道这个复合词的意思是:作为精勤的诸行,即精勤行。在这里采用“精勤”一词,是为了排除“有为行”等其他含义。或者,因为能造作各种差别,所以叫“行”,也就是一切精进。其中,为了排除除了四种作用成就者之外的其他,而采用“精勤”一词,所以意思是:精勤所成、最胜所成。巴利
‘‘Chandaṃ ce bhikkhu adhipatiṃ karitvā labhati samādhi’’ntiādi (vibha. 432) vacanato chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti etthāpi chandādhipati samādhi chandasamādhīti adhipatisaddalopaṃ katvā samāso vuttoti viññāyati. Adhipatisaddatthadassanavaseneva pana ‘‘chandahetuko, chandādhiko vā samādhī’’ti sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 431) vuttaṃ, tasmā idhāpi chandādhipati samādhi chandasamādhīti veditabbo. Taṃ pana chandaṃ vuttanayena saddhāsīsena dassento ‘‘saddhādhipateyyā cittekaggatā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ padhāna’’nti vā vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ. Vīriyasaddāpekkhāsahitaṃ ekavacanena vatvā catubbidhassapi vīriyassa adhippetattā nibbattetabbadhammavibhāgena ca ‘‘ime saṅkhārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena padhānabhūtā saṅkhārāti evaṃ samāso veditabbo. Saṅkhatasaṅkhārādinivattanatthañcettha padhānaggahaṇaṃ. Atha vā taṃ taṃ visesaṃ saṅkharotīti saṅkhāro, sabbampi vīriyaṃ. Tattha catukiccasādhakato aññassa nivattanatthaṃ padhānaggahaṇanti padhānabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtāti attho.
在精进神足的解说中,“与精进定精进行相应”(《分别论》435)这句话里,“精进”出现了两次。其中,前一个是对定的限定,即“以精进为增上的定,就是精进定”;后一个是为了显示相应的支分。因为一切处所说的相应支分只有两种:定和精进行。欲等只是对定的限定。而精进行只以“精进”一词来限定,并不以欲等来限定,所以这里并没有说精进行是以精进为增上。精进既已限定了定而住立下来,又作为相应支分,由“精进行”这个词说出,因此也并不是说以两种精进来相应。然而,定既为欲等所限定,与这被限定的定相应的精进行和其余诸法又都在其中,所以依对定的种种限定,说为“四种神足”。欲等的限定性质,是依据各自作为所依而成立的,因此在“欲定精进行神足”等表述中,“足”字既表示方法,也表示所依,由此说欲等是神足。正如在阿毗达摩《后细分别》中,通过“四神足:欲神足……”(《分别论》457)等,直接说欲等就是神足。在《问论》中,虽然以“四神足——在此,比丘以欲定……”(《分别论》462)开头,但又把欲等分别为善等。正是为了显示作为方法的神足,才显示了作为所依的神足。否则就不会有四种的区别。这里应当依据巴利原文来理解义理的决定。巴利
Vīriyiddhipādaniddese ‘‘vīriyasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgata’’nti (vibha. 435) dvikkhattuṃ vīriyaṃ āgataṃ. Tattha purimaṃ samādhivisesanaṃ ‘‘vīriyādhipati samādhi vīriyasamādhī’’ti, dutiyaṃ samannāgamaṅgadassanatthaṃ. Dve eva hi sabbattha samannāgamaṅgāni samādhi, padhānasaṅkhāro ca. Chandādayo samādhivisesanāni. Padhānasaṅkhāro pana padhānavacaneneva visesito, na chandādīhīti na idha vīriyādhipatitā padhānasaṅkhārassa vuttā hoti. Vīriyañca samādhiṃ visesetvā ṭhitameva samannāgamaṅgavasena padhānasaṅkhāravacanena vuttanti nāpi dvīhi vīriyehi samannāgamo vutto hoti. Yasmā pana chandādīhi visiṭṭho samādhi tathā visiṭṭheneva tena sampayutto padhānasaṅkhāro, sesadhammā ca, tasmā samādhivisesanānaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāro iddhipādā’’ti vuttā. Visesanabhāvo ca chandādīnaṃ taṃtaṃapassayanavasena hotīti chandasamādhi…pe… iddhipādanti ettha nissayatthepi pādasaddena upāyatthena chandādīnaṃ iddhipādatā vuttā hoti. Tathā hi abhidhamme uttaracūḷabhājanīye ‘‘cattāro iddhipādā chandiddhipādo’’tiādinā (vibha. 457) chandādīnameva iddhipādatā vuttā. Pañhāpucchake ca ‘‘cattāro iddhipādā – idha bhikkhu chandasamādhī’’ti (vibha. 462) ārabhitvāpi puna chandādīnaṃyeva kusalādibhāvo vibhatto. Upāyiddhipādadassanatthameva hi nissayiddhipādadassanaṃ kataṃ. Aññathā catubbidhatāva na hotīti. Ayamettha pāḷivasena atthavinicchayo veditabbo.
说完了依彼分断、依正断、依出离远离之后,没有提到依止息远离,这是因为应当修习的神足,已经在“欲定……神足”(《分别论》432)这一段里说过了。因为已经修习了神足的人,所应当现证的,就是含摄在果位里的神足。巴利
Tadaṅgasamucchedanissaraṇavivekanissitattaṃ vatvā paṭippassaddhivivekanissitassa avacanaṃ ‘‘chandasamādhi…pe… iddhipādaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (vibha. 432) bhāvetabbānaṃ iddhipādānaṃ vuttattā. Bhāvitiddhipādassa hi sacchikātabbā phalapariyāpannā iddhipādāti.
“舍”这个词有“舍弃”的意思,也有“投入”的意思,所以说舍有两种。所谓“按前面所说的方式”,就是指以彼分断和正断的方式,以及以倾向彼、以彼为所缘的方式。而“转变之时”,指的是观的刹那。巴利
Vossaggasaddo pariccāgattho, pakkhandanattho cāti vossaggassa duvidhatā vuttā. Yathāvuttena pakārenāti tadaṅgasamucchedappakārena, tanninnabhāvārammaṇappakārena ca. Pariṇamantaṃ vipassanakkhaṇe.
14 前分慧:指在单一转向或多重转向的心路中生起的近行慧。证得慧:指安止慧。再次说的前分慧:指多重转向的近行慧,或者结生慧。近行慧:指在单一转向中,或者在一切处生起的近行慧。巴利
14.Pubbabhāgapaññāyāti ekāvajjananānāvajjanavīthīsu pavattaupacārapaññāya. Adhigamapaññāyāti appanāpaññāya. Puna pubbabhāgapaññāyāti nānāvajjanupacārapaññāya, paṭisandhipaññāya vā. Upacārapaññāyāti ekāvajjane, sabbattha vā pavattaupacārapaññāya.
问与答的简择:也就是对如前所述之问的回答简择。依照已说的方式:是指随顺前面所说的“显示未见之义、断除疑惑”的方式。巴利
Pucchāvissajjanavicayopīti yathāvuttāya pucchāya vissajjanavicayopi. Vuttanayānusārenāti adiṭṭhajotanā, vimaticchedanā cāti heṭṭhā vuttanayānugamanena.
15 有学与无学:有学,指有学的圣者;无学,指无学的圣者。以观为前导的断:先让观走在前面,然后生起烦恼的断除,也就是“断现观”的意思。巴利
15.Sekheasekheti sekkhe ariyapuggale, asekkhe ariyapuggale. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamappahāneti vipassanaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā pavattakilesappahāne, pahānābhisamayeti attho.
先指出“凡是无常、苦、无我”这一巴利原文,然后再显示“在无常、苦、无我中”这一句在此也有人这样读诵。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti pāḷiṃ dassetvā puna ‘‘yaṃ anicce dukkhe anattanī’’ti vacanaṃ evampettha paṭhantīti dassetuṃ.
其余的杂染法和清净法:是指除了贪著之外剩下的杂染法,以及一切清净法。以无有:就是通过不修习,通过令其不存在。巴利
Sesasaṃkilesavodānadhammāti gedhato avasiṭṭhasaṃkilesadhammā ca sabbavodānadhammā ca. Abhāvenāti abhāvanena abhāvakaraṇena.
精勤加行:强烈的相应就是加行,加行本身就是精勤,所以叫精勤加行,这里指的是心。向上抛起:就是不让心掉进懈怠那一边,而像把它向上抛到善法那一边去运转。精进:从不让不善法生起这个意义上说的最上精进。应当被运用的:应当以修习、策励等方式来运用。未生:就是已落入不可称说的状态,指那些已由地得、已执取所缘、未被镇伏、未被断除的已生者。巴利
Payogaparakkamanti bhusaṃ yogo payogo, payogova parakkamo payogaparakkamo, cittaṃ. Ukkhipatīti kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adento kusalapakkhe uddhaṃ khipento viya pavattati. Padhānavīriyanti akusalānaṃ anuppādanaṭṭhena uttamavīriyaṃ. Yojetabbānīti ‘‘āsevamāno vāyamatī’’tiādinā yojetabbāni. Anuppannāti avattabbataṃ āpannānanti bhūmiladdhārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamugghāṭituppannānaṃ.
16 因为已经说到“第八人的诸根”,所以才说“初道中的信等”。经中提到“根”,应当理解为只是举例而已。巴利
16. ‘‘Aṭṭhamakassa indriyānī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘paṭhamamagge saddhādayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Indriyaggahaṇañca pāḷiyaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
不净随观就是身随观念处,所以经文说“以修习念处而善调伏了欲寻”。为了说明正在生起的定也是在调伏了欲寻之后才生起的,就说了“以无过失的快乐为近因”等话。通过“于诸善法中勤修精进”等话,说明由对法的欲求而生起的精进之欲能增长忍耐。就像要依靠有助于无过失诸法的法,避开无助于它们的法,这也是通过亲近慧而发生的,因此说了“对定等”这些话。巴利
Asubhānupassanā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya suniggahito kāmavitakko’’ti. Samādhi uppajjamāno kāmavitakkampi niggahetvā eva uppajjatīti dassento ‘‘anavajjasukhapadaṭṭhānenā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Kusalesu dhammesu āraddhavīriyo’’tiādinā dhammacchandato uppajjamāno vīriyacchando khantiṃ paribrūhetīti dasseti. Anavajjadhammānaṃ upakārakadhammāsevanaṃ viya anupakārakadhammaparivajjanampi paññānisevaneneva hotīti āha ‘‘samādhiādīna’’ntiādi.
17 为了以“补特伽罗”为立足点来分别解说以“一切法”为立足点的教说,所以说了“所谓世间”等话。为了显示这一点,就说“显示一切法……”。在广大法中,“住”即是成就它们的状态。其余的情况也一样。“正在增长时”:就是当这些法被宣说、使解脱逐渐成熟的时候。巴利
17. Sabbadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ desanaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena vibhajituṃ ‘‘loko nāmā’’tiādi vuttanti dassento ‘‘sabbadhammānanti…pe… dassetu’’nti āha. Mahaggatadhammesu ṭhānaṃ taṃsampādanāva. Tathā sesesu. Vaḍḍhiyamānesūti yathā vimuttiṃ paripācayanti, evaṃ brūhiyamānesu.
见遍知,是指对色法和无色法,从它们各自的特相以及从缘的角度去彻底了知。因此说“知遍知”。连同破除对立面而阐明三相,在这里意指的是“修习遍知”,所以说“修习……遍知”。或者,这里的含义也可以这样理解:以见为意义的遍知就是见遍知,以修习为意义的遍知就是修习遍知。巴利
Dassanapariññāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ salakkhaṇato, paccayato ca parijānanā. Tenāha ‘‘ñātapariññā’’ti. Paṭipakkhavidhamanena saddhiṃ lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanā idha ‘‘bhāvanāpariññā’’ti adhippetāti āha ‘‘bhāvanā…pe… pariññā cā’’ti . Dassanatthā pariññā dassanapariññā, bhāvanatthā pariññā bhāvanāpariññāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
粗触等,就是粗等之触等。自证后,是指以证智、以慧了知之后;或者也可以说,对于安住者,以证知为因——这就是它的含义。义,就是果。理,就是所说的理趣。巴利
Kakkhaḷaphusanādīti kakkhaḷādiphusanādi. Abhijānitvāti abhiññāya paññāya jānitvā, ṭhitassa abhijānanahetu vāti attho. Atthoti phalaṃ. Nayoti vuttanayo.
有人也读作“这是无为”。四理通达者,就是精通一性、异性等四种理趣的人。于教说之适宜善巧者,就是善于诸法的教说方式的人。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ asaṅkhata’’ntipi paṭhanti. Catunayakovidoti ekattanānattādinayacatukke nipuṇo. Desanāyuttikusaloti dhammānaṃ desanāvidhimhi kusalo.
“应使其相似”,即依会通的方式来做,这是其用意。应当引出这样的语句:“这个开示与那个开示是这样会通的。”所谓“从义理上偏离”,就是不相应的义理;所谓“没有关联的义理”,就是彼此之间没有关联的句义。“发趣的思择”,难道不像“理的思择”那样,是不混杂诸理的另一种思择吗?他考虑到这一质难,便说了“然而因为……”等语。所谓“此处所放置的”:指置于此经的抉择之中,因为它属于对经义的思择;或者应知,此处正是借着显示“发趣含摄在转趣之中”,说明了发趣如同根本句一样,并没有另外的句义。巴利
Sadisī kātabbā saṃsandanavasenāti adhippāyo. Ānetabbā ‘‘ayaṃ desanā imāya desanāya evaṃ saṃsandatī’’ti. Atthato apetanti ayuttatthaṃ. Asambandhatthanti aññamaññaṃ asambandhapadatthaṃ. Nanu paṭṭhānavicāro nayavicāro viya hārehi asammisso vicāraṇantaroti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Idha nikkhittoti idha suttavicaye suttatthavicārabhāvato nikkhitto, etena vā paṭṭhānassa hārantogadhabhāvadassaneneva mūlapadānaṃ viya paṭṭhānassa padatthantarābhāvo dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
“这部经”是指正在被注释的这部经。“在哪个句”是指正在被注释的那首偈颂。“通过那项抉择”是指通过提问等抉择,以及通过味等抉择。巴利
Imassa suttassāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānasuttaṃ sandhāyāha. Kasmiṃ vā padeti saṃvaṇṇiyamānaṃ gāthaṃ sandhāyāha. Tabbicayenāti pucchādivicayena, assādādivicayena ca.
3. 合理理趣分别的注释巴利
3. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
18 18. 不应这样理解这部经的含义,而应这样理解。为了在审查合理与不合理之时,对不应取和应取的含义作出舍弃与执取,先就应当舍弃的情况,指出其首要的方法,因此说:“经义若以不如实的方式被执取,便成为其领域。”就像“放开左边,取右边”一样。因为当经义被经文语句辨明为应舍弃之性质时,应取之性质也就随之保留下来。正如他接下来会说:“安住于慈心的人,嗔心会占据其心而住”——这样的开示不合理;“嗔心趋于舍断与消失”——这样的开示才合理。巴利
18. Evametassa suttassa attho na gahetabbo, evaṃ pana gahetabboti aggahetabbagahetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ vijahanaggahaṇatthāya yuttāyuttivicāraṇāyaṃ vajjetabbesu tāva paṭhamaṃ paṭipattīti dassento āha ‘‘atathākārena gayhamānā suttatthā visayo’’ti yathā ‘‘vāmaṃ muñca, dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.14; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.213). Vajjetabbabhāvato hi suttapadehi suttatthe vivecite gahetabbabhāvo ca avasiṭṭho hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘mettāvihārassa sato byāpādo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatī’ti na yujjati desanā, ‘byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī’ti yujjati desanā’’ti (netti. 21).
通过理则的拣择,把不如实的部分排除掉之后,为了说明如实执取法的原因,他宣说“大教法:这些应当由大人物来指示,所以叫大教法”,用“佛陀等”这样的话来表达这个意思。“依止处”就是安立的方式。在“其他”中,指的是僧教法等。因为这里只出现了第一种含义,意思就是:大教法是决断的原因。“引经等”中的“等”字也包含了引经的随行。因为引经和引经随行的显示,对于某人按照所受持的典籍来决断“是法”,就是原因;引经和引经随行的显示为“非法”。若如其所受持之典籍,与经律会通为“法”,不会通为“非法”,作为决断之因,其意即“若是如此”;法由这些而被传授、被了知,故为传承者、宣说者。巴利
Yuttiniddhāraṇena ayathāsabhāvato vivecitvā yathāsabhāvato dhammassa gahaṇakāraṇāni kathento ‘‘mahantā apadisitabbā etesanti mahāpadesā’’ti imamatthamāha ‘‘buddhādayo’’tiādinā. Patiṭṭhānānīti patiṭṭhānasādhanāni. Sesesūti saṅghāpadesādīsu. Paṭhamattho eva hi idha pāḷi āgato, vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ mahāpadesoti adhippāyo. Suttotaraṇādīti ādisaddena suttānotaraṇādipi saṅgayhati. Suttotaraṇavinayasandassanāni hi kenaci yathābhatassa ganthassa ‘‘dhammo’’ti vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ. Suttānotaraṇavinayāsandassanāni ‘‘adhammo’’ti. Yadi evanti yadi yathābhatassa ganthassa suttavinayehi saṃsandanaṃ ‘‘dhammo’’ti, asaṃsandanaṃ ‘‘adhammo’’ti vinicchayakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ santeti attho. Sampadīyati ñāpīyati dhammo etehīti sampadāyā, akkhātāro.
贪等烦恼被它调伏,所以叫“律”,也就是原因。因此他说“调伏贪等的相”。那又是什么呢?就是有决定性的止观等法。这些就是后面将要说的“四十三菩提分法”。巴利
Vinīyanti rāgādayo etenāti vinayo, kāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rāgādivūpasamanimitta’’nti. Kiṃ pana taṃ? Sādhiṭṭhānasamathavipassanādidhammā. Ye parato ‘‘tecattālīsaṃ bodhaṅgamā dhammā’’ti (netti. 24) vakkhati.
律大教法因为随顺适宜,所以叫“随顺适宜”;经大教法因为和它相似,在注释用语里也叫“随顺适宜”。因此说“所谓随顺适宜”。巴利
Vinayamahāpadesā kappiyānulomato anulomakappiyaṃ nāma, taṃsadisatāya suttantamahāpadesāpi anulomakappiyanti aṭṭhakathāvohāro. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ anulomakappiyanti vuccatī’’ti.
虽然世尊在各种场合所说的零星教法本身就是义注,但结集法的人把三藏佛语结集起来之后,按照解释其含义的方式把它编成读诵的次第,所以就叫作“师说”。因此说“师说就是义注”。实际上,三次结集所传下来的、解释佛语含义的论述次第,后来由铜掌岛的大长老们用僧伽罗语记录下来。“自意”就是长老说。“只应取与经文相符的”——这是说明:应当像与经文相会通那样,从大教法中引出其含义。为了说明师说有时因为读诵次第的过失而与经文不相符,那种就不应取,所以他说“只有与经相符的才可取”。巴利
Yadipi tattha tattha pavattā bhagavato pakiṇṇakadesanā aṭṭhakathā, sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakehi tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ saṅgāyitvā tassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanānurūpena vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā ācariyavādo nāma. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā’’ti. Tissopi saṅgītiyo āruḷho eva hi buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito. Attanomati theravādo. Samentameva gahetabbanti yathā pāḷiyā saṃsandati , evaṃ mahāpadesato atthā uddharitabbāti dasseti. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa kadāci pāḷiyā asaṃsandanāpi siyā, so na gahetabboti dassento āha – ‘‘suttena samento eva gahetabbo’’ti.
与四大教示相符,意思就是不与四大教示相违。现在,为了说明这种不相违的方式,就说了“以这个、以那个”等话。在这里,入经等本身就是原因。而因为它有多种多样的方式,所以说了“以种种方式”。在注释某部经时,应当依照注释来把握——这就是上下文的关系。“所持来者”就是指被引来的。“从其他经”就是从其他经中。这里的意思是:对于正在注释的经,应当依照注释来把握其中产生的意义——凭借某种机缘从其他经中抽出并引来的经句,即通过入经等方式,以及种种原因的方式,在不违背四大教示的前提下。因此他说“由此……中略……应作”。其中,“合理理趣之运用”是指通过合理理趣的抉择,应当运用此合理理趣。或者说,“合理理趣之运用”是指依此合理理趣,按照将要讲述的方法去寻求合理性,然后以那合理性来运用一切理趣——这就是它的意思。因为,这合理理趣正是寻求合理性的特征。因此他说:“一切理趣的基地与行境,在于对合理与不合理的审察”(《导论》4),以及“依此合理性,应以种种相互关联的理由来寻求”(《导论》20)。巴利
Catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjatīti catūhi mahāpadesehi na virujjhati. Idāni taṃ avirujjhanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘yena yenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Suttotaraṇādi eva hettha kāraṇaṃ. Tassa ca anekākāratāya ‘‘pakārenā’’ti vutto. Saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte saṃvaṇṇanāvasena gahetabbanti sambandho. Ābhatenāti ānītena. Suttatoti suttantarato. Ayañhettha attho – kenaci pasaṅgena suttantarato uddharitvā ānītena suttapadena suttotaraṇādinā, kāraṇappakārena ca catumahāpadesāvirodhena saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte saṃvaṇṇanāvasena atthajātaṃ gahetabbanti. Tenāha ‘‘tena…pe… kātabbā’’ti. Tattha yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti yuttiniddhāraṇavasena ayaṃ yuttihāro yojetabbo. Atha vā yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti iminā hārena vakkhamānanayena yuttigavesanaṃ katvā tāya yuttiyā sabbahārayojanā kātabbāti attho. Lakkhaṇañhetaṃ yuttigavesanāya, yadidaṃ yuttihāro. Tenāha ‘‘sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ, yā bhūmī, yo ca gocaro tesaṃ. ‘‘Yuttāyuttaparikkhā’’ti (netti. 4), ‘‘imāya yuttiyā aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba’’nti (netti. 20) ca.
19 或者,也可以这样连接:如果所有词句都表达同一个意思。巴利
19. Yadi vā sabbāni padāni ekaṃ atthaṃ abhivadantīti yojanā.
20 对于已住立者来说的变异:已住立者那种变异、那种变成别的状态,这就叫作老。刹那死就是刹那灭。断灭死就是漏尽者的蕴般涅槃。巴利
20.Jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattanti ṭhitassa yaṃ aññathattaṃ aññathābhāvo, ayaṃ jarā nāma. Khaṇikamaraṇaṃ khaṇikanirodho. Samucchedamaraṇaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhaparinibbānaṃ.
“纯粹的”是指不混杂老。老是一回事,死是另一回事;理由是“因为见到了所承认的纯粹之死”。“像那些诸天神……”是相似的例证,而神足等则是不相似的例证,应当把握随顺与相违来结合理解。巴利
Kevalassāti jarāya amissassa. Aññāva jarā, aññaṃ maraṇanti ‘‘paṭiññātassa kevalassa maraṇassa diṭṭhattā’’ti hetu. Yathā taṃ devānanti sadisūdāharaṇaṃ, visadisūdāharaṇaṃ pana iddhipādādayo, anvayabyatirekā gahetvā yojetabbā.
以那些,即老和死。巴利
Tehīti jarāmaraṇehi.
以“具有衰老和坏灭的本质”这个说法,他把渴爱、老、死统合为没有差别。虽然“渴爱是一回事,老是一回事,死又是另一回事”这个道理本身已经成立,而且针对这一点也说过“不是这个”等话,但为了指出在可能被回避的质难中潜藏的过失,他引用巴利文句“如果像老死那样……”,并说“如果……显示……”。“有”指的是意图。“这些”指的是渴爱、老、死这些。巴利
‘‘Jīraṇabhijjanasabhāvā’’ti iminā lesena taṇhājarāmaraṇānaṃ anaññattaṃ yojeti. Yadipi ‘‘aññā taṇhā, aññā jarā, aññaṃ maraṇa’’nti siddhovāyamattho, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘na ida’’ntiādi, tathāpi sakkuṇeyyaparihārāyaṃ codanāti ajjhāruḷhaṃ tattha dosaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yadi ca yathā jarāmaraṇa’’nti pāḷipavattāni dassento ‘‘yadi…pe… dassetī’’ti āha. Bhāvoti adhippāyo. Etesanti taṇhājarāmaraṇānaṃ.
有人这样读:“应当用这个道理,通过彼此相关的各种理由去寻求。”他们的意思是:也要从句读上寻求,因为在别处从义理上另有所指。为了显示从句读上另有所指,巴利文中说了“如箭……”等。“这些”指这些箭、熏烟等。“欲的颠倒”指在所求不得时,或与不满相聚时。这也成为一项论证,因为它显示了所认定的他义相违。“老死的颠倒”指当老死不存在时。因为,在所认定的老死不存在时,渴爱并非就不存在。巴利
‘‘Imāya yuttiyā aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba’’nti ca keci paṭhanti, byañjanatopi gavesitabbaṃ, aññattha atthato aññatthampīti adhippāyo. Tameva byañjanato aññatthaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘salloti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imesanti salladhūpāyanānaṃ. Icchāvipariyāyeti icchitālābhe, appaccayasamavāye vā. Idampi samatthanaṃ hoti yathādhippetassa aññatthassa byatirekadassanabhāvato. Jarāmaraṇavipariyāyeti jarāmaraṇe asati. Na hi yathādhippetajarāmaraṇābhāve taṇhā na hotīti.
“以两种方式说”,即按两种类别来说,或者说两次。应当这样理解:将“此……通过作为所缘或称呼的方式”这样对作用的指称连接起来。“特相”是指这些欲与渴爱的本性所构成的这种特殊相。巴利语中也有“以两名”的说法。即使如此,意思是:欲与渴爱在各自不同的对象以及如上所说的状态差别上,确实有某种程度的区分。但为了显示从本质上说并没有差别,便说“虽如此”。巴利
Dvidhā vuttāti dvippakārena vuttā, dvikkhattuṃ vā vuttā. Yaṃ idaṃ…pe… ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā abhilapananti evaṃ kiriyāparāmasanaṃ yojetabbanti veditabbaṃ. Visesoti ayaṃ etāsaṃ icchātaṇhānaṃ pakatisaṅkhāto viseso. ‘‘Dvīhi nāmehī’’tipi pāḷi. Yadipi evanti kāmaṃ visayavisesesu evaṃ yathāvuttaavatthāvisesena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthi kāci bhedamattāti attho. Sabhāvato pana bhedo natthīti dassento ‘‘tathāpī’’ti āha.
“想要”就是贪求。渴爱就是想要它显现出来。以灼烧为义,是指遍烧的状态。以拖拽为义,是指夺取、拉走的意思。流动的,是指因贪欲而变得湿润。因为与那相应的喜,所以是润滑的、涂了油的。缠缚,是指已经展开,以遍满的方式存在于色等三界诸法中。已展开,只是前面那个词换了读音,把 ta 音变成了 ṭa 音来说。广大的,就是宽阔。挣扎,是指努力、忍受。因为染著的人即使被贪染的对象用脚踢,也能忍受。有人说,退却、挣扎。“Visakkatī”就是四处努力、行进并忍受。“Visaṃharatī”就是收拢:它显示诸欲中的种种功德,以种种行相将心从朝向出离的状态中收拢、聚集。或者,visa 是苦,它带走、承载那(苦),这就是意思。由于能产生苦的业是它的因,所以是“以毒为根”(visamūlā);或者,毒即苦等种类的受是它的根,因此是“以毒为根”;因为它是苦集,所以毒是它的果,因此是“以毒为果”(visaphalā)。只是受用色等之苦,而非不死(涅槃),因此是“以毒为受用”(visaparibhogā)。执无常等为常等,故成为欺诳者(visaṃvādikā)。应当以处处之语源方式了知词的形成。然而,为了显示此处的主要含义,又说“visatā vā panā”等。巴利
Icchantīti kāmenti. Taṇhāyanā pātukāmatā. Santāpanaṭṭhenāti paridahanabhāvena. Ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhenāti avaharaṇaṭṭhena. Saritānīti rāgavasena allāni. Taṃsampayuttapītivasena siniddhāni sinehitāni. Visattikāti vitthatā rūpādīsu tebhūmakadhammesu byāpanavasena. Visaṭāti purimavevacanameva ta-kārassa ṭa-kāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Visālāti vipulā. Visakkatīti parisakkati sahati. Ratto hi rāgavatthunā pādena tāḷiyamānopi sahati. ‘‘Osakkanaṃ, vipphandanaṃ vā visakkana’’nti vadanti. Aniccādikaṃ niccādito gaṇhantī visaṃvādikā hoti. Visaṃharatīti tathā tathā kāmesu ānisaṃsaṃ dassentī vividhehi ākārehi nekkhammābhimukhappavattito cittaṃ saṃharati saṃkhipati. Visaṃ vā dukkhaṃ, taṃ harati, vahatīti attho. Dukkhanibbattakassa kammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā, visaṃ vā dukkhādibhedā vedanā mūlaṃ etāyāti visamūlā, dukkhasamudayattā visaṃ phalaṃ etissāti visaphalā. Rūpādidukkhasseva paribhogo etāya, na amatassāti visaparibhogā. Sabbattha niruttivasena padasiddhi veditabbā. Yo panettha padhāno attho, taṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘visatā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
让心湿润、产生爱,就是“滋润”。以束缚为义,就是“结”的意思。以期望为义,就是欲求的意思。以欢喜为义,就是贪著滋味的意思,或者也可以说是接受、欢迎的意思。巴利
Sinehanaṃ pemakaraṇaṃ. Bandhanaṭṭhenāti saṃyojanaṭṭhena. Āsīsanaṭṭhenāti icchanaṭṭhena. Abhinandanaṭṭhenāti assādanaṭṭhena, sampaṭicchanaṭṭhena vā.
21 不喜就是厌倦。智厌离指的是厌离随观。正如在“苦……”等句中,对诸行所说的道理已经讲过了——这就是文句的衔接方式。巴利
21.Anabhiratīti ukkaṇṭhā. Ñāṇanibbidāti nibbidānupassanā. Yathā ca dukkhū…pe… cāresu yutti vuttāti yojanā.
乐行道钝通、乐行道速通、乐行道等。如果有人能够通过苦行道获得殊胜,那么对他像对适合乐行道的人那样说法,就不会带来殊胜,所以那样的说法不恰当。为了说明这个意思,就用“贪行者”等话来显示。对于贪行者,如果不先讲清楚诸欲的过患、缺陷、染污以及出离的利益,一上来就只讲观法,那是不会带来殊胜的,因为他的心还没有被净化。为了说明这个意思,巴利圣典里就说“观……开示”。在剩下的文句里也是如此:正如圣典按“贪行者”等分类说明了说法的不恰当,同样地,对于嗔行者等类别,虽然圣典没有明文说“对嗔行者应说不净”等,但也应按照实际情况推知其义而加以说明。那么,为什么要在合理理趣论中辨别那些不恰当的说法呢?针对这个质问,经文说“在此……”等。其余的也是一样的道理:在针对嗔行者等一一辨别、寻求不恰当的说法时,用的也是同样的方法。巴利语中也有“随顺舍弃”,意思与此相同。巴利
Sukhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññā sukhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññā sukhāpaṭipadādayo. Yo dukkhāya paṭipadāya visesaṃ adhigantuṃ bhabbo, tassa sukhāpaṭipadāyogyassa viya kariyamānā dhammadesanā visesāvahā na hoti, tasmā sā na yuttāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘rāgacarito’’tiādinā. Rāgacaritassa tathā tathā kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ, okāraṃ, saṃkilesaṃ, nekkhamme ānisaṃsañca avibhāvetvā ādito vipassanākathāva kariyamānā na visesāvahā hoti āsayassa asodhitattāti etamatthaṃ dassento pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vipassanā…pe… desanā’’ti āhāti veditabbaṃ. Sesapadesupīti yathā ‘‘rāgacaritassā’’tiādinā rāgacaritakoṭṭhāsavasena pāḷiyaṃ desanāya ayutti vuttā, iminā nayena sesapadesupi dosacaritakoṭṭhāsādīsupi ‘‘dosacaritassa puggalassa asubhaṃ deseyyā’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ avuttopi yathāsambhavamattho niddhāretvā vattabbo. Kasmā pana yuttihāre ayuttiniddhāraṇā katāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Sesesupi eseva nayoti sesesupi dosacaritādivasena niddhāritesu ayuttigavesanesu ayameva upāyo. Anulomappahāna’’ntipi pāḷi, so evattho.
通过“智所能及之地”这句话,说明合理理趣所涉及的范围非常广大。为什么它的范围这么广大呢?因为它是合理理趣的审察,而且所要称颂的法具有种种理路精细等殊胜功德。为了说明这一点,才说“那是什么原因呢?”巴利
‘‘Yāvatikāñāṇassa bhūmī’’ti etena yuttihārassa mahāvisayataṃ dasseti. Kasmā panāyaṃ mahāvisayoti? Yuttivicārabhāvato, saṃvaṇṇetabbassa ca dhammassa nānānayanipuṇādiguṇavisesayogatoti dassento ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ti āha.
“后部分”是指后面的部分。由于说到慈心住者的部分没有缺失,所以说不相合。因此说“具念”。正是由于前面所说的原因,因为它正是对立面。巴利
Aparabhāgeti pacchābhāge. Mettāvihāribhāgassa aparihīnatāvacanato ayogo vutto. Tenāha ‘‘sato’’ti. Yathāvuttakāraṇato evāti paṭipakkhattā eva.
由于断除同体性之故,这是见所计度者的。当人们通过观察过患而对寻生起厌离时,就连第二禅那的近行禅那诸法也不以寻为所缘,更何况第二禅那本身的诸法呢?正是出于这个意思,才说:这里“俱行”一词的含义,是作所缘之义。巴利
Pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato diṭṭhimaññitassa. Ādīnavadassanena vitakkaṃ jigucchantā dutiyajjhānassa āsannaupacārajjhānadhammāpi vitakkārammaṇā na honti, pageva dutiyajjhānadhammāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘ārammaṇakaraṇattho hettha sahagatasaddo’’ti.
像这样,先依据经典展示了合理理趣门中合理与不合理的考察;现在,为了用随顺经典的推理也来展示它,便以功德为门分析过失,因此说了“然而在这里”等话。这段话的意思很清楚。巴利
Evaṃ yuttihāralakkhaṇaṃ āgamato yuttāyuttavicāraṃ dassetvā idāni āgamānugatāya yuttiyāpi taṃ dassetuṃ guṇamukhena dosavibhajanaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ uttānatthameva.
4. 足处理趣分别的注释巴利
4. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
22 “那些那些的”,意思是毫无遗漏地全部收摄。因此,凡是经中所说的那些法,以及作为那些法之因的,这一切全都包括在内,这样说就是这个意思。为了显示“不能如实通达一切法”这个含义,才说了“但是他在哪里呢”等话。巴利
22.Tesaṃtesanti anavasesapariyādānaṃ, tena ye sutte vuttā ca dhammā, ye ca tesaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ, tesaṃ sabbesampīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kattha pana so’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“可爱之类”是指具有可爱性质的东西。“邪行道”就是放逸犯戒,或者邪执取。杀生的思即使只生起一次,因为会流出怨恨,所以能成为嗔生起的原因;放逸犯戒或邪执取即使只生起一次,也能成为痴生起的原因——经典里虽然没有明说,但应当依据道理来确定。为了说明这一点,就说“嗔的……依这个道理,应当了知其中的含义”。“取总相”是取颜色、形状这类总体特征,“取随形好”就是取随形好,所以说为“取总相与随形好”。其中,这里的“相”指女人相、男人相;“随形好”指手、脚、笑、说话等具体特征。触是它的缘,所以叫“触缘性”,这种状态就是“触缘性”。通过它来贪着,所以叫“味”,也就是渴爱。巴利
Piyāyitabbajātiyanti pemanīyasabhāvaṃ. Micchāpaṭipadāti pamādāpatti, micchābhiniveso vā. Ekavāraṃ uppannāpi pāṇātipātacetanā verappasavanato dosassa, ekavāraṃ uppannāpi pamādāpatti, micchābhiniveso vā mohassa uppattikāraṇanti pāḷiyaṃ avuttampi nayato niddhāretabbanti dassento ‘‘dosassa…pe… imināva nayena attho veditabbo’’ti āha. Nimittatthaggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānaṃ, anubyañjanatthaggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ anubyañjananti ‘‘nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha nimittaṃ itthipurisanimittaṃ. Anubyañjanaṃ hatthapādahasitakathitādi. Phasso paccayo etissāti phassapaccayā, taṃbhāvo phassapaccayatā. Assādeti etāyāti assādo, taṇhā.
对于“诸事是应被了知之法”这句话,他说“不误解所缘、通达所缘的自性”。为了显示这里所说的正行道,说了“戒与定具足”。或者,在圣典中依据一分特相,或者依据适合色香贪者的颜色、气味等,先说了“以取青瘀相、脓烂相为相的不净想”,接着说了“那是厌离的足处”。为了显示厌离,说了“厌离”等。其中,为了从恐惧中区分开来,特别用“以智”来限定。如此生起,就是依厌离的方式生起。巴利
Vatthūni ñeyyadhammoti āha ‘‘vatthuavippaṭipatti visayasabhāvapaṭivedho’’ti. Idhādhippetaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlasamādhisampadāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ekadesupalakkhaṇavasena, vaṇṇagandharāgisappāyavasena vā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vinīlakavipubbakaggahaṇalakkhaṇā asubhasaññā’’ti vatvā ‘‘tassā nibbidāpadaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ nibbidaṃ dassento ‘‘nibbidā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paritassanato visesetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’ti visesitaṃ. Tathā pavattanti nibbidanākārena pavattanaṃ.
毗提诃王的女儿卢遮如理地浮出(宿世记忆)时,她的宿命智成了业自属智之因,而非因亲近不善之人;那位国王的将军阿拉塔与奴仆比迦咖则是不如理地浮出,情形不同。为了说明此义,论师说“此……应当举例说明”。“净信”即澄净。“状态差别”是指相应诸法以无浑浊为特征而区分的阶段差别。“已至处所”指已达到的状态,意即以三宝为所缘境。通过“身”等说法,显示在没有状态差别时,仅凭自性成立者即是足处。巴利
Yoniso ummujjantiyā videharañño dhītāya rucāya jātissarañāṇaṃ kammassakataññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ ahosi, na pana asappurisūpanissayato, ayoniso ummujjantassa tasseva rañño senāpatino alātassa bījakassa dāsassāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘imassa ca…pe… udāharitabbo’’ti āha. Soti pasādo. Avatthāvisesoti sampayuttadhammānaṃ anāvilabhāvalakkhito avatthābhedo. Āyatanagatoti ṭhānagato, ratanattayavisayoti attho. ‘‘Kāyo’’tiādinā avatthāvisesena vinā sabhāvasiddhameva padaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti.
在这里,经文中先前已经确定了哪些法是谁的立足处;为了说明这些法是哪些法的立足处,于是开始讲“另一种方式”等等,应当这样理解。对滋味的作意被说成具有不如理作意的特征,应当知道这只是举例而已;或者说,这样说是为了表明大多数众生是因为贪而转起不如理作意的。再生本身就是再生缘,它的状态就是再生缘性,所以说“以再生有的状态”。“已确定的状态”是指色等在看等所缘上已确定的作用。“有的支分”是指有的因;在第二种解释中,“支分”是指组成部分,或者也可以把业轮作为因支来配合理解。巴利
Imasmiṃ ca ṭhāne pāḷiyaṃ pubbe yesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāritaṃ, te dhammā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānāni honti, te dassetuṃ ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi āraddhanti veditabbaṃ. Assādamanasikāro ayonisomanasikāralakkhaṇo vutto nidassanamattaatthoti veditabbo, yebhuyyena sattānaṃ lobhavasena ayonisomanasikārā saṃvattantītti dassanatthaṃ vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Upapatti eva opapaccayaṃ, tassa bhāvo opapaccayikanti āha ‘‘upapattibhavabhāvenā’’ti. Vavatthitabhāvoti vavatthitabhāvo rūpassa dassanādipaṭiniyatārammaṇakiccatā. Bhavassa aṅgānīti bhavassa kāraṇāni. Dutiye aṅgānīti avayavā, kammavaṭṭampi vā kāraṇaṅgabhāvena yojetabbaṃ.
“业处”是指通过修习而增长、扩展。“在那些之中”是指在知处非处等之中。如理亲近恭敬善友——也就是依靠这位善友而获得的一切闻法,与法相应的欢悦便生起,因此知处是知欢悦的近因。同样,由于那种解脱存在,解脱知见便生起,因此那解脱就是它的近因——这个意思很明显,所以说“前面……中略……很容易理解”。“与摄持俱”是指与知遍知一起,因为知遍知是度遍知的摄持。其余部分容易理解。巴利
Kammaṭṭhānassāti bhāvanāya brūhanā vaḍḍhanā. Tesūti titthaññutādīsu. Kalyāṇamittassa sammadeva payirupāsanāyapīti taṃ nissāya laddhena sabbāya dhammassavanena dhammupasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ hotīti titthaññutā pītaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ yāya vimuttiyā sati vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ hotīti sā tassa padaṭṭhānanti ayamattho pākaṭoti āha ‘‘purimānaṃ…pe… suviññeyyo evā’’ti. Saha adhiṭṭhānenāti ñātapariññāya saddhiṃ. Ñātapariññā hi tīraṇapariññāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
5. 特相理趣分别的注释巴利
5. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
23 有人问:“特相理趣所涉及的范围是什么?”接着又问:“那它的范围到底是什么呢?”回答是:那些具有同一相、但还没有被单独说出来的法。身随观一旦开始修,受随观等就能顺利成就。通过这句话,就说明了受所摄的念等其实也已经被包含在内,因为它们作为念处,具有同一相。身随观念处以信所摄持的精进、念、定、慧根作为成就的条件,其他念处也是这样,所以才这样说。这个意思在注释书(《导向》注51)后面还会讲到。按照这个方法,在其他解说“同一相”的地方,也应该这样理解其含义。后面讲四阵列理趣注释(《导向》注20)时还会说到。巴利
23.‘‘Lakkhaṇahārassa visayaṃ pucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘ko pana tassa visayo’’ti vutte samānalakkhaṇā avuttadhammā. Kāyānupassanāya samāraddhāya vedanānupassanādayo sukheneva sijjhantīti tabbacanena vedanāgatāsatiādīnaṃ vuttabhāvo dassito satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānassa saddhānuggahitāni vīriyasatisamādhipaññindriyāni sādhanaṃ, evaṃ itaresampīti katvā vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ attho aṭṭhakathāyameva (netti. aṭṭha. 51) parato āgamissati. Iminā nayena sesesupi ekalakkhaṇatāniddesesu attho veditabbo. Paratoti catubyūhahāravaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 20).
“不混杂”的意思是:受等也依止在这里、在这里结生,所以在修习身随观时,即使涉及对受等的随观,也不与它们混杂——这就是它的含义。巴利
Asammissatoti vedanādayopi ettha sitā ettha paṭisandhāti kāye vedanādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tadasammissatoti attho.
为了断除把整体执为实有、随假名乱跑、执取实质并紧抓不放,要把身体按四肢和各个部分拆开,再把各部分按头发等拆开,再把头发等按四大种和所造色拆开,所以说“如此,于身不……”等等。在宫殿、城市这类由部分聚成的整体上,主张有整体的人也会去执取整体。可是,有些人可能会想“所谓城市,确实有某种真实含义”,因而随假名乱跑;所以,为了说明对女人、男人等随假名乱跑的情形,就用城市来作比喻。另有某类众生等。他看见女人或男人。难道用眼睛能看见女人、男人吗?确实不能,但因为是依着“我看见女人”“我看见男人”这样的假名在运作,才说“他看见”。或者,以邪见去看的人,他所看到的并不是色处,或者说那个并不是色处——这是意思之一。又或者,那个被计为头发等四大种和所造色集合的所见并不成立,或者说所看到的并不像所说的那样——这是另一个意思。“不见所见”的意思是:凡是色处,或者被看成由头发等四大种和所造色聚合而成的那种所见,他都无法用智慧之眼如实见到——这就是它的意思。巴利
Avayavigāhasamaññātidhāvanasārādānābhinivesanisedhanatthaṃ kāyaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgehi, tāni ca kesādīhi, kesādike ca bhūtupādāyarūpehi vinibbhujituṃ ‘‘tathā na kāye’’tiādimāha. Pāsādādinagarāvayavasamūhe avayavivādinopi avayavigāhaṇaṃ karonti. Nagaraṃ nāma koci attho atthīti pana kesañci samaññātidhāvanaṃ siyāti itthipurisādisamaññātidhāvane nagaranidassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Añño koci sattādiko. Yaṃ passati itthiṃ, purisaṃ vā. Nanu cakkhunā itthipurisadassanaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, ‘‘itthiṃ passāmi, purisaṃ passāmī’’ti pana pavattasamaññāvasena ‘‘yaṃ passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Micchādassanena vā diṭṭhiyā yaṃ passati, na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ hoti, rūpāyatanaṃ vā taṃ na hotīti attho. Atha vā taṃ kosādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ na hoti, diṭṭhaṃ vā yathāvuttaṃ na hotīti attho. Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passatīti yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ vā diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paññācakkhunā bhūtato na passatīti attho.
不是“随观其他法”,意思是不去观察其他的自性,也就是说,他不是从不净等别的角度去观察。巴利
Na aññadhammānupassīti na aññasabhāvānupassī, asubhādito aññākārānupassī na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
所谓“地身”,是说因为头发等是地界法的聚集,所以称之为“身”;或者只是就特相意义上的地,把遍布全身、具有种种差别、前后相续而转起的(地),以聚集的方式整体把握,而称之为“身”。其他地方也应这样理解。巴利
Pathavīkāyanti kesādiṃ pathavīdhammasamūhattā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati, lakkhaṇapathavimeva vā anekabhedabhinnaṃ sakalasarīragataṃ pubbāpariyabhāvena pavattamānaṃ samūhavasena gahetvā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati. Evaṃ aññatthāpi.
所谓“被称为行相聚合的”,就是指无常等行相的总集,是它的同义说法。巴利
Ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassāti aniccatādiākārasamudāyapariyāyassa.
在三有当中的烦恼,就是指以三种存在状态为对象的烦恼。一切处:意思是,在一切情况下,当心低沉或掉举时,有可欲的利益;或者说,无论心低沉还是掉举,一切应当修习的觉支都因为这个念而存在,所以叫一切处。内缩:指内心往内退缩,也就是懈怠的意思。巴利
Tīsu bhavesu kileseti bhavattayavisayakilese. Sabbatthikanti sabbattha līne, uddhate ca citte icchitabbatthā, sabbe vā līne, uddhate ca bhāvetabbā bojjhaṅgā atthikā etāyāti sabbatthikā. Anto saṅkocoti anto olīyanā, kosajjanti attho.
24 “已执取”是指通过修习而执取,也就是“已修习”的意思;或者也可以说,是通过言说而执取。不过,这里要说明的是修习层面的执取,所以在这段话里,以言说来表示执取,重点其实落在修习的执取上。对于已经修习了念处的人,却说他的正勤等菩提分法没有修习——这是不可能的,没有这样的事。为了用共相来点明这个道理,经中才说:“当四念处正在修习时,四正勤也就走向修习圆满”等等。巴利
24.Gahitesūti bhāvanāggahaṇena gahitesu, bhāvitesūti attho, vacanena vā gahitesu. Bhāvanāggahaṇadīpanatthattā pana vacanena gahaṇassa bhāvanāggahaṇamettha padhānaṃ. Yassa satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, tassa sammappadhānādayo bodhipakkhiyadhammā na bhāvitāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti ca samānalakkhaṇatāpadesena imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
颠倒之所以被断除,是因为它与正直之道完全相反。经中说:“由食集而有身集,由触集而有受集”(《相应部》5.408),“行缘识,识缘名色”(《相应部》1.1, 39;《中部》3.126;《大品》1;《优陀那》1;《分别》225)。根据这些说法,作为身等之集起原因的段食、触食、意思食、识食,通过遍知身等而被遍知,因为断除它们的对立面就是遍知。为了说明这一点,所以说了“四食”等。“遍一切”则如“于诸取而无取”等处所说。巴利
Vipallāsāpahīyanti ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato. ‘‘Āhārasamudayā kāyassa samudayo, phassasamudayā vedanānaṃ samudayo (saṃ. ni. 5.408), saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.1, 39; ma. ni. 3.126; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato kāyādīnaṃ samudayabhūtā kabaḷīkārāhāraphassamanosañcetanāviññāṇāhārākāyādīnaṃ parijānanena pariññātā honti tappaṭipakkhappahānatoti dassento ‘‘cattāroāhārā’’tiādimāha. Sabbatthāti ‘‘upādānehi anupādāno bhavatī’’ti evamādīsu.
在这里,五种欲乐在身体上最为明显,所以身体特为欲取的所依处;以乐受为享受而不理会他世,便生起“没有布施”等邪执,所以受是见取的所依处;在心上执取为恒常,因而对常见生起“依自己的戒律等而得到清净”的执取,所以心是戒禁取的所依处;不能依名色之差别如实看见真实的人,会生起“我执”,所以诸法是我语取的所依处。因此说:“修习四念处时,于诸取而无取。”巴利
Tattha yasmā pañca kāmaguṇā savisesā kāye labbhantīti visesena kāyo kāmupādānassa vatthu, sukhavedanassādavasena paralokanirapekkho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.445; 2.94-95, 225; 3.91, 116; saṃ. ni. 3.210; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 938) parāmāsaṃ uppādetīti diṭṭhupādānassa vedanā, citte niccaggahaṇavasena sassatassa ‘‘attano sīlādivasena parisuddhaparāmasanaṃ hotī’’ti sīlabbatupādānassa cittaṃ, nāmarūpaparicchedena bhūtaṃ bhūtato apassantassa ‘‘attābhiniveso hotī’’ti attavādupādānassa dhammā vatthu, tasmā ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu upādānehi anupādāno bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
按照前面所说的方式来看:身是欲轭的所依处;在诸有之中,因为执取快乐而品味有的滋味,所以受是有轭的所依处;在心方面,因为执取相续、密集之相而心生我执,所以心是见轭的所依处;因为对法加以简别很困难,而且诸法唯是法性、难以通达,所以产生迷惑,因此法是无明轭的所依处。由于修习四念处能够成就断除这些轭,所以说从诸轭中解脱。也正是根据这一点,才说明从诸漏中达到无漏、从诸暴流中得以渡越,因为欲贪等本身就是欲轭、欲漏、欲暴流等的体性。巴利
Yasmā pana vuttanayeneva kāyo kāmayogassa vatthu, bhavesu sukhaggahaṇavasena bhavassādo hotīti bhavayogassa vedanā, santatighanaggahaṇavasena citte attābhiniveso hotīti diṭṭhiyogassacittaṃ, dhammavinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya ca duppaṭivijjhattā sammoho hotīti avijjāyogassa dhammā, vatthu, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya tesu tesaṃ pahānasiddhito yogehi visaṃyuttatā vuttā. Eteneva āsavehi anāsavatā, oghehi nittiṇṇatā ca saṃvaṇṇitā hoti kāmarāgādīnaṃ eva kāmayogakāmāsavakāmoghādibhāvato.
按照前面所说的方式,身是贪欲身系的所依处;对于苦受、变易苦和行苦所摄的受,由于“苦受使嗔随眠潜在”(《中部》1.465)这一道理,它特别成为嗔恚身系的所依处;在心方面,由于执取常恒,生起常见,进而执取“凭自己的戒行就能得清净”等想法,所以心是戒禁取身系的所依处;由于看不到名色是依因缘而生的,就产生有见和无见,这称为“此是真实”的执著,所以法是这种执著的所依处——这些应当与四念处联系起来理解。巴利
Vuttanayeneva kāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, ‘‘dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā visesena byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu, citte niccābhinivesavasena sassatassa ‘‘attano sīlena suddhī’’tiādiparāmasanaṃ hotīti sīlabbataparāmāsassa cittaṃ vatthu, sappaccayanāmarūpadassanābhāvato bhavavibhavadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto idaṃsaccābhiniveso hotīti tassa dhammā vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānāti yojetabbaṃ.
按照前面所说的方式,尤其是:身是贪箭的所依处,受是嗔箭的所依处;“心因为执取恒常,把自我执著为‘我殊胜’等而燃烧”,所以心是慢箭的所依处;同样按照前面所说的方式,法是痴箭的所依处——应当这样把四念处连接起来理解。巴利
Vuttanayeneva visesato kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu, vedanā dosasallassa, ‘‘cittaṃ niccaggahaṇavasena attābhinivesaṃ attānaṃ seyyādito dahatī’’ti cittaṃ mānasallassa, vuttanayeneva dhammā mohasallassa vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānāti yojetabbaṃ.
因为通过身随观等,在身、受、心、法被遍知时,色蕴、受蕴、想蕴、行蕴也就被遍知了;确实,当心被遍知时,想也就被遍知了。因此说:他的识住也走向遍知。巴利
Yasmā pana kāyānupassanādīhi kāyavedanācittadhammesu pariññātesu rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā pariññātā honti, citte hi pariññāte saññāpi pariññātāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
同样地,尤其是当身体怀有贪求而走上欲邪行时,身体就是欲邪行的所依处;按照前面所说的方式,受是嗔恚的相,所以受是嗔邪行的所依处;由于执取相续与密集,在有贪等心中就生起痴,所以心是痴邪行的所依处;由于不了悟法的自性而生起怖畏,所以法是怖畏邪行的所依处。因此,通过修习四念处,就能舍弃邪行的趋往,所以经文说“不因邪行而行邪行”。巴利
Tathā visesato kāye sāpekkhā chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti kāyo chandāgatiyā vatthu, vuttanayeneva vedanā byāpādassa nimittanti sā dosāgatiyā vatthu, santatighanaggahaṇavasena sarāgādicitte sammoho hotīti mohāgatiyā cittaṃ, dhammasabhāvānavabodhena bhayaṃ hotīti bhayāgatiyā dhammā vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya agatigamanappahānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘agatigamanehi ca na agatiṃ gacchatī’’ti.
“由于不善的喜悦”这句话,是考虑到“这个含义也成立”才说的。不过,依据“对于乐受,贪随眠潜在”这一说法,应当知道:通过摄取乐受以及其中的随眠,就开示了集圣谛。而“苦圣谛被开示”这句话,是通过摄取苦苦,把苦圣谛以特别显著的方式阐明出来。至于在俱行等情况下应当说明的内容,已经在下面《指示分释论注释》中说明了。巴利
‘‘Akusalassa somanassassa vasenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘ayampi attho sambhavatī’’ti katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) pana vacanato sukhavedanāggahaṇena tatthānusayanena samudayasaccaṃ desitanti veditabbaṃ. Desitaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti dukkhadukkhaggahaṇena sātisayaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ pakāsitaṃ hotīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ desita’’nti vuttaṃ. Sahacaraṇādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā niddesavāravaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5 ādayo) vuttaṃ.
6. 四阵列理趣分别的注释巴利
6. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
25 25. “Hārānaṃ”一词,在抉择(niddhāraṇa)关系中用属格。在诸执持当中,这个四阵列理趣的特点在于审察经文的文句,因此这样连接。所以说了“显示文句……等等”。“Yāyā”则是就词源解释而言。巴利
25.Hārānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Hāresu imassa catubyūhahārassa visesato suttassa byañjanavicayabhāvatoti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘byañjana…pe… dassetī’’ti. Yāyāti niruttiyā.
在注释经文时,凡是适合给出词源解释的地方,都只是随顺世间的共同称呼来说的。先修习圆满前行道,之后才证得谛现观,所以说“世俗……等……是”。或者,通过把握各种施设名目的方式而通达究竟谛,这就是此处文句的关联。巴利
Yathārahanti saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yaṃ yaṃ arahati nibbacanaṃ vattuṃ, taṃtaṃlokasamaññānurodheneva. Pubbabhāgapaṭipadā sampādetvā pacchā saccābhisamayaṃ pāpuṇātīti āha ‘‘sammuti…pe… hotī’’ti, taṃtaṃpaññattiggahaṇamukhena paramatthaggahaṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ vā iminā sambandho.
这里说的“两者之间”,是就那不属于根所系缚的色相续而说的。而在契入理趣(《指导论》注42等)中,此语原是就依门而转起的触等诸法而说的;为了显示这一点,便给出了“在触等俱生诸法之中”这一含义。不过注释师们说:“‘antarena’(之间)这个词,是用来显示另一种解释的。”因此,这里的含义是:不是此世间,不是他世间,而是这两者之间。另一种解释是:“ubhayamantarena”这个词表示除二者之外别无他处。它的意思是:禅修者不依止此世间,也不依止他世间来修习禅那,除二者之外岂有别处。巴利
Yamidaṃ anindriyabaddharūpasantānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti idha vuttaṃ. Otaraṇahāre (netti. aṭṭha. 42 ādayo) panassa dvārappavattaphassādidhamme sandhāya vuttabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhayamantarenāti phassasamuditesu dhammesū’’ti attho vutto. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu ‘‘antarenāti vacanaṃ pana vikappantaradīpana’’nti. Tasmā ayamettha attho – na imaṃ lokaṃ, na huraṃ lokaṃ, atha kho ubhayamantarenāti. Aparo vikappo – ubhayamantarenāti vā vacanaṃ vikappantarābhāvadīpanaṃ. Tassattho – na imaṃ lokaṃ, na huraṃ lokaṃ nissāya jhāyati jhāyī, ubhayamantarena pana aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ atthīti.
那些错误理解“中般涅槃者”和“有求再生者”这些经文语句的含义、从而主张确实存在中有的说法,也要驳斥。因为在无热天等各处,没有越过那里的寿量中段,就在中途证得最高道,以烦恼毫无剩余的般涅槃而般涅槃,所以叫“中般涅槃者”,意思是中途般涅槃,并不是处于中有状态——这是前一句经文的意思。后一句中,那些已经生起、不会再生的,也就是诸漏尽者,前句称之为“已生”。与此相反,仍在寻求再生的,就是“有求再生者”。由于他们尚未断除与有相连的结缚,所以是有学圣者和凡夫。或者按四生来说:卵生和胎生的有情,只要还没有破开卵壳和胎膜,就叫做“有求再生者”;从卵壳、胎膜出来之后,就叫做“已生”。湿生和化生的有情,在第一个心识刹那叫做“有求再生者”,从第二个心识刹那起就叫做“已生”。另一种说法:以某种姿势出生,只要还没有达到另一种姿势,那期间就是“有求再生者”,此后就是“已生”。因此,应当否定中有存在。既然有直接随顺经文的含义,何必还要用那种功能不确定、凭空构想出来的“中有身”呢?巴利
Yepi ca ‘‘antarāparinibbāyī, sambhavesī’’ti ca imesaṃ suttapadānaṃ atthaṃ micchā gahetvā atthi eva antarābhavoti vadanti, tepi yasmā avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā antarā aggamaggādhigamena anavasesakilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyantīti antarāparinibbāyī, na antarābhavabhūtoti purimassa suttapadassa attho. Pacchimassa ca ye bhūtā eva, na puna bhavissanti, te hi (kathā. anuṭī. 507) khīṇāsavā, purimapadehi ‘‘bhūtā’’ti vuttā. Tabbiparītatāya sambhavaṃ esantīti sambhavesino. Appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā sekkhā, puthujjanā ca. Catūsu vā yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujasattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ, vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesī nāma. Aṇḍakosato, vatthikosato ca bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajaopapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesī nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesī, tato paraṃ bhūtāti attho, tasmā natthīti paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Sati hi ujuke pāḷianugate atthe kiṃ aniddhāritasāmatthiyena antarābhavena attabhāvaparikappitena payojananti.
有些人提出这样的论证:我们确实看到,依相续而转起的诸法,在两地之间毫无间断地生起。就像稻种等没有心识的相续中那样,在有识的相续中也应当同样,毫无间断地在两地之间生起。这个道理只有在承认中有的情况下才说得通,否则就不成立。对于他们这种说法,应当反问:一位具足神通、心得自在的人,把身体定成随心意而行,在一刹那间从梵天界来到此处,或者从此处前往梵天界,这又该怎么解释?如果他们认为一切情况下都不允许诸法在有间断的地方生起,那么即使他们说神通境界不可思议,这里同样也有业异熟不可思议的说法。所以那只不过是他们自己的主张罢了。因为自性法本身就是不可思议的,它们有时依靠特殊的缘而在有间断的地方显现,有时也在没有间断的地方显现。比如从口中发出的声音等,在另一个地方,如镜面或山壁等处,会看到依缘而生的影像和回声等。所以不能把一种道理不加区分地套用到一切情况上。这就是这里的要点。若要详细讨论以影像等譬喻来成立中有的问题,应当从《论事注》中了解。巴利
Yaṃ pana ye ‘‘santānavasena pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvo diṭṭho. Yathā taṃ vīhiādiaviññāṇakasantāne, evaṃ saviññāṇakasantānepi avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvena bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañca nayo sati antarābhave yujjati, nāññathā’’ti yuttiṃ vadanti. Tehi iddhimato cetovasippattassa cittānugatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa khaṇena brahmalokato idhūpasaṅkamane, ito vā brahmalokagamane yutti vattabbā. Yadi sabbattheva vicchinnadese dhammānaṃ pavatti na icchitā, yadipi siyā ‘‘iddhivisayo acinteyyo’’ti, taṃ idhāpi samānaṃ ‘‘kammavipāko acinteyyo’’ti vacanato, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva. Acinteyyasabhāvā hi sabhāvadhammā, te katthaci paccayavisesena vicchinnadese pātubhavanti, katthaci avicchinnadese ca. Tathā hi mukhaghosādīhi aññasmiṃ dese ādāsapabbatappadesādike paṭibimbapaṭighosādikaṃ paccayuppannaṃ nibbattamānaṃ dissati, tasmā na sabbaṃ sabbattha upanetabbanti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana paṭibimbassa udāharaṇabhāvasādhanādiko antarābhavavicāro kathāvatthuppakaraṇassaṭīkāyaṃ (kathā. anuṭī. 507) gahetabbo.
另有一些人说:“‘此处’是指欲有,‘他处’是指无色有,‘两者之间’是指色有。”他们还说:“‘此处’是指缘法,‘他处’是指缘所生法,‘两者之间’是指施设法。”但这些说法在一切注释书中都找不到,所以应当只按前面所说的方式来理解其含义。所谓“剩余色”,是指与水界、空界一起存在的相色以及食素,因为这里指的是不与根相连的色。对于那位漏尽者,他那以涅槃为所缘的心,不被知道也不被了知,因为经中说“正在禅虑”。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Apare pana ‘‘idhāti kāmabhavo, huranti arūpabhavo, ubhayamantarenāti rūpabhavo vutto’’ti vadanti, ‘‘idhāti paccayadhammā, huranti paccayuppannadhammā, ubhayamantarenāti paṇṇattidhammā vuttā’’ti ca vadanti, taṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu natthi, tasmā vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Avasiṭṭhaṃ rūpanti āpodhātuākāsadhātūhi saddhiṃ lakkhaṇarūpāni, ojañca sandhāyāha anindriyabaddharūpassa adhippetattā. Tassa khīṇāsavassa taṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ na jānanti na ñāyanti ‘‘jhāyamānā’’ti vuttattā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
7. 转回理趣分别的注释巴利
7. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
29 由于策发界具有摧毁不善法的本质,或者因为它在断除不善、成就善法时具有策励建立的本质,所以叫“策发界”。“成为那样者”是指具足戒等功德的人。欲界等就是三界。因为征服了三界,所以三界自在者就是死王。这些烦恼虽然在无始轮回中长久扎根,但只需短时间修习善法就能断除,所以说烦恼“无力、虚弱”。因此说“无力者却能战胜他”。巴利
29. Akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ viddhaṃsanasabhāvattā, akusalānaṃ vā pajahane kusalānaṃ sampādane paṭṭhapanasabhāvattā ārambhadhātu. Tathābhūtāti sīlādīhi samaṅgībhūtā. Kāmadhātuādikā tidhātuyova tedhātu. Tassa abhibhavanato tedhātuissaro maccurājā. Anādimatisaṃsāre cirakālaṃ laddhapatiṭṭhāpi acirakālaṃ bhāvitehi kusalehi dhammehi samucchindanīyattā abalā kilesāti vuttaṃ ‘‘abalaṃ dubbala’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘abalā naṃ balīyantī’’ti.
这句话是这首偈颂的一个句子。在这里,“定的近因”应当理解为:把策励平等修习当作定的因。这个道理也适用于其他类似的地方。“戏论”指的就是贪等烦恼。“如此而作解释”的意思是:仅以作为教说之近因的状态,来作义理上的解释。巴利
Idaṃ vacanaṃ ayaṃ gāthāpādo. Samādhissa padaṭṭhānanti ettha samādhissa kāraṇaṃ samatānuyoge niyojanatoti yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Papañcāti rāgādayova. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitanti desanāya padaṭṭhānabhāveneva atthasaṃvaṇṇanā katāti attho.
“Nti”指的是那段教导。“Tassā”指的是转向,以同类等方式,是为了让智慧成熟的人获得殊胜的证悟。在“利得、决断、占有、悭吝”等词当中,“利得”是指获得色等所缘。因为只有在寻求时它才会生起,所以被“寻求”这个词涵盖进去了。“决断”是指这样生起的思量:“这些会用来让我得到色所缘,这些用来让我得到声等所缘,这些是我的,这些是别人的,这些我会受用,这些我会存起来。”这就是决断。因为它以利得为因、以寻求为根本,所以同样被“寻求”这个词涵盖;占有和悭吝也是这样。其中,“占有”就是执持“这是我的”。“悭吝”就是“只能是我的”,无法忍受和别人共享。因此,古代诸师这样解释这个词的含义:“‘愿这个悭吝只是我的,不要成为别人的稀奇’,因为是这样生起的,所以称为悭吝。”至于受用方面的决断等,应当知道它们包含在受用之中。“欲贪”是微弱的贪。“执著”是“这是我的”,以渴爱的力量牢牢确定下来,所以说“欲贪与执著就是渴爱”。“守护相”是通过关门、锁箱等方式好好守护的样子。而受用之相,是当人染着、贪求、执取、迷恋,像野兽一样受用时,陷入放逸。这样,守护和受用两者都包括在内了。放逸有三种,是依渴爱而说的,为了说明这一点,所以说“三种是依渴爱而说的”。巴利
Nti taṃ desanaṃ. Tassāti sabhāgādivasena āvaṭṭanassa. Paripakkañāṇānaṃ visesādhigamāya. Lābhavinicchayapariggahamacchariyānītiādīsu lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇappaṭilābho. So pariyesanāya sati hotīti pariyesanāggahaṇena gahito. Vinicchayoti ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavatto vitakko vinicchayo. So lāpitahetukattā pariyesanamūlakatāya pariyesanāggahaṇeneva gahito, tathā pariggahamacchariyāni. Tattha pariggaho ‘‘mama ida’’nti pariggaṇhanaṃ. Macchariyaṃ ‘‘mayheva hotū’’ti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanaṃ. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘mayhevidamacchariyaṃ hotu, mā aññesaṃ acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.9.23). Paribhogatthānaṃ pana vinicchayādīnaṃ paribhogantogadhatā veditabbā. Chandarāgo dubbalarāgo. Ajjhosānaṃ ‘‘mama ida’’nti taṇhāvasena balavasanniṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘chandarāgaajjhosānā taṇhā evā’’ti. Ārakkhanimittaṃ dvārapidahanamañjūsāgopanādinā suṭṭhu rakkhaṇanimittaṃ. Pāpāni karonto paribhoganimittaṃ ratto giddho gadhito mucchito hutvā migova paribhuñjananimittaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjatīti evaṃ pariyenārakkhā paribhoganimittaṃ. Pamādo tividho taṇhāya vasena kathitoti dassento ‘‘tividho taṇhāyāti vutta’’nti āha.
所谓“不区分而说”,是说:虽然曾按“以哪一种取而成为有取”分别提问,作答时却仍不加区分,只说“以无明和渴爱”。至于“渴爱和无明,依四种取”,则是按欲取等四种取加以分别说明:诸蕴本身具有苦的性质、具有苦谛的性质,因此是应被遍知之法;诸取本身具有集的性质、具有集谛的性质,因此是应被断除之法——借此把这两层显示出来。应当这样理解前后文的关联。巴利
Avisesena vuttanti ‘‘katamena upādānena saupādānā’’ti vibhāgena pucchitvāpi ‘‘avijjāya ca taṇhāya cā’’ti avinibbhujitvā vuttaṃ. Taṇhañca avijjañca caturupādānaṃvasenāti kāmupādānādīnaṃ catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ vasena vibhajitvā khandhānaṃ dukkhabhāvena dukkhasaccabhāvena saha pariññeyyabhāvaṃ, upādānānaṃ samudayabhāvena samudayasaccabhāvena saha pahātabbabhāvaṃ dassetīti yojanā.
30 “Yo”等语所说的三种放逸,寻求、守护以及受用的相,是这样关联的。因为对于放逸的人来说,放逸以作者的身份成为寻求和守护财物的原因,所以用“作者”来指称它;而对于受用来说,它则是受用的相。“以其对治”这句话的含义,用“以不放逸的修习”来解释,由此显示出止的状态。“Khepanā”就是导向灭尽。以清净分和与放逸异分之法之力来说:清净分以及那与放逸异分之法,就是……法、止,是依此力而说的。巴利
30.‘‘Yo’’tiādinā vutto tividho pamādo pariyesati, ārakkhaṇañca karoti, paribhoganimittañcāti sambandho. Pamādo hi pamajjantassa puggalassa bhogānaṃ pariyesanāya, ārakkhaṇāya ca hetubhūto kattubhāvena upacarito, paribhogassa pana nimittaṃ. ‘‘Tappaṭipakkhenā’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivarati ‘‘appamādānuyogenā’’ti, tena samathabhāvaṃ dasseti . Khepanāti khayapāpanā. Vodānapakkhavisabhāgadhammavasenāti vodānapakkho ca so pamādassa visabhāgadhammo cāti vodāna…pe… dhammo, samatho, tassa vasena.
在止存在时,所谓“念”,是指在作为立足处的禅那中存在念;意思是把那禅那作为基础。“所谓慧”,是指从辨别名色等开始生起的智慧。因此他说“这是观”。“在已断除的当中”,是指在正在被断除的当中。巴利
Samathe satīti adhiṭṭhānabhūte jhāne sati, taṃ pādakaṃ katvāti attho. Yā paññāti nāmarūpaparicchedādivasena pavattapaññā. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti. Pahīnesūti pahīyamānesu.
“清净分”是指:先安立勤界等清净分。“以异分法之力”就是依放逸之力。“以同分法之力”就是依先前所安立的勤界等清净法之止等同分法之力。巴利
Vodānapakkhanti ārambhadhātuādivodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā. Visabhāgadhammavasenāti pamādavaseneva. Sabhāgadhammavasenāti pubbe nikkhittassa ārambhadhātuādivodānadhammassa samathādisabhāgadhammavasena.
再者,这里要说的并不是无需再次净化,而是已经达到顶点的净化,所以说“但那是由阿拉汉果而有的”。巴利
Puna apariyodāpaniyaṃ sikhāppattapariyodāpanaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘taṃ pana arahattena hotī’’ti.
说“以痴为等起”,是因为认定“只有痴才是等起”。否则,离间语以嗔为等起这件事,就应当像妄语以痴为等起那样,被说成是以痴为等起了。巴利
Mohasamuṭṭhānatā vuttā ‘‘moho eva samuṭṭhāna’’nti katvā. Aññathā pisuṇāvācāya dosasamuṭṭhānatā musāvādassa viya mohasamuṭṭhānabhāvā vattabbā siyā.
已经达到业道状态的不善法,以及还没达到业道状态的不善法,都被“一切恶”这个词统摄在内,所以才说“以业道和业的区分”。巴利
Kammapathabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ, appattānañca akusaladhammānaṃ ‘‘sabbapāpa’’nti padena pariggahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kammapathakammavibhāgenā’’ti.
31 “其余诸句”是指这首偈颂中“善之具足”等剩下的句子。“如所证得”是指自己证得的方式,之后是地和方向。巴利
31.Sesapadānanti ‘‘kusalassa upasampadā’’tiādīnaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124; peṭako. 29) gāthāya avasiṭṭhapadānaṃ. Yathādhigatanti attanā adhigatappakāraṃ, pacchā bhūmidisā.
“使上升”是指让人从人界去到最上的天界。巴利
Upariyāpentīti manussalokato upariṭṭhimaṃ devalokaṃ gamenti.
32 “如所说的法”,指的是戒和道。“渴爱、无明等”中的“等”字,一并涵盖了与它们同属一类的烦恼,以及那些烦恼的所依之法。“止、观等”中的“等”字,包含了沙门果。在这里,就“灭守护”被说到的程度而言,相应地,以“藉彼守护”说明了道是守护行为的工具。应当这样理解:前二谛是依异分法而确定,后二谛是依同分法回转而确定。巴利
32.Yathāvuttassa dhammassāti sīlassa ca maggassa ca. Taṇhāvijjādīnanti ādisaddena tadekaṭṭhakilesā gayhanti, tesaṃ padaṭṭhānadhammā ca. Samathavipassanādīnanti ādisaddena sāmaññaphalānaṃ saṅgaho. Yadaggena cettha ‘‘nirodho rakkhatī’’ti vutto, tadaggena maggo rakkhaṇakiriyāya karaṇaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yena rakkhatī’’ti. Visabhāgadhammavasena purimāni sabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena pacchimāni saccāni niddhāritānīti yojetabbaṃ.
8. 区分理趣分别的注释巴利
8. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
33 “于诸法”是指在福业、布施等各类不同、各有自性的法之中。这里说的“可得者”,就是在前面所说的这些法当中所能得到的。“地的分别”,是指欲界地、见地等不同层次的区分。“立足处的分别”,是指那些福业等法是某些法的立足处,或者某些法是那些福业等法的立足处,它们之间的分类。“哪些经”,是就作为根本立足处的四部经——即杂染分等——来说的。正是因为依靠这四部经不混杂地划定了法的界限,这些法才被特别地分别开来,所以说“特别地”。如果这样的话,为什么这里只举出习惯分和抉择分这两部经呢?其实并非如此,因为通过“出离”和“究竟”这两个层面,另外两部也已经包含在内了。也就是说,凡是经由出离而超越的习惯分的法,它们本身就是杂染分;凡是以抉择分为最终目标的法,它们就是无学分。因此,只举出这两部,就已经把另外两部也包含进来了。所以说“为这四部经的教导”。对于“这四部经”,应当理解为:从巴利文或即将讲述的教导中,已经含摄了另外两部,而不是排斥它们。巴利
33.Dhammesūti puññādidānādibhedabhinnesu sabhāvadhammesu. Tattha labbhamānoti tesu yathāvuttesu dhammesu labbhamāno. Bhūmivibhāgoti kāmāvacarādidassanādibhūmippabhedo. Padaṭṭhānavibhāgoti te puññādidhammā yesaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ vā ye dhammā padaṭṭhānaṃ, tabbibhāgo. Yesaṃ suttānanti mūlapadaṭṭhānabhūtānaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ catunnaṃ suttānaṃ vasena. Asaṅkaravavatthānena hi etesu suttesu sātisayaṃ dhammā vibhattā nāma honti. Tenāha ‘‘visesato’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttāni evettha gahitānīti? Nayidamevaṃ nikkhamanapariyosānabhāvena itaresampi gahitattā. Yato hi nissaṭā vāsanābhāgiyā dhammā, te saṃkilesabhāgiyā. Yaṃpariyosānā nibbedhabhāgiyā dhammā, te asekkhabhāgiyāti dvayaggahaṇeneva itarampi dvayaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘imesaṃ catunnaṃ suttānaṃ desanāyā’’ti. Imāni cattāri suttānīti pāḷiyā, vakkhamānāya desanāya vā itaradvayasaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, na paṭikkhepo.
因为“就由此”这句话,是由于决定性还没有成立;而通过这个梵行,以及依止这个梵行,就成为梵行者,这一点是可以成立的。或者,这里的“eva”一词应当理解为表示合集的意思。“或许有对它的否定”,意思是:对于那种以八等至为梵行的主张,可能存在否定。若真是这样,这个开示就成了有所保留的,还留有未说完的内容。巴利
Tenevāti niyamassa akatattā, tato ca tena tannissitena ca brahmacārī bhavatīti siddhaṃ hoti. Eva-saddo vā samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo. Siyā tassa paṭikkhepoti tassa aṭṭhasamāpattibrahmacariyassa siyā paṭikkhepo. Evaṃ sati sāvasesā desanā siyā.
在这里,那两种断——即“彼分断”等——作为立足处,并不属于可计入此处的范畴,所以说“依正断与止息断而言”。同样,这里有些人读作“tena eva”。而“读作‘tena eva brahmacariyena’”这一说法,是针对《指导论》第33页“立于防护戒”处所提到的圣典异读而说的。“因为……将说……”这一句,则是为了说明后一种读法更为合理,而给出理由的说明。巴利
Tadaṅgādippahānadvayaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ idha gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti ‘‘samucchedapaṭippassaddhippahānānaṃ vasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hettha keci ‘‘tenevā’’ti paṭhanti. ‘‘Teneva brahmacariyenāti paṭhantī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘saṃvarasīle ṭhito’’ti (netti. 33) ettha vuttaṃ pāḷivikappaṃ sandhāya vadati. ‘‘Yasmā…pe… vakkhatī’’ti idaṃ pacchimapāṭhasseva yuttatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ.
怎么理解“以智慧”呢?广大福业的本性是不穿透、不决断,所以不被“通达分经”所涵盖;但因为它们属于“熏习分”,所以恰好被“熏习分经”所涵盖。正因为归属于熏习分,后面那种读法才更合理。否则,这个开示就会有遗漏、不完整。所以论师才说:“确实不是……开示……。”巴利
Kathaṃ mantāti? Anibbedhasabhāvattā mahaggatapuññānaṃ na nibbedhabhāgiyasuttena saṅgaho, vāsanābhāgiyattā pana vāsanābhāgiyasutteneva saṅgahoti. Tadupasaṅgā hi pacchimo eva pāṭho yuttataro. Itarathā sāvasesā desanā bhaveyya. Tenāha ‘‘na hi…pe… desetī’’ti.
因为杂染分和无学分的内容将在后面说到,所以这里说“依即将说到的……”。这里的“一切处”是兼顾前后文来说的。由于它需要顾后,注疏里就把它解释成“以一切部分,放入十一处中”。其中,针对以句等为始的抉择理趣之句义,而说“于十一处中”。但因为也需要顾前,所以还应该按“以一切部分,由开示、由果……”等来配合解释。巴利
Saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyānaṃ parato vakkhamānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkhamānānaṃ…pe… vasenā’’ti. ‘‘Sabbato’’ti idaṃ pubbaparāpekkhaṃ. Tassa parāpekkhatāya ‘‘sabbatobhāgena ekādasasu ṭhānesu pakkhipitvā’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ yojitaṃ. Tattha padādike vicayahārapadatthe sandhāya ‘‘ekādasasu ṭhānesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbapekkhatāya pana ‘‘sabbatobhāgena desanāya phalenā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
属于杂染分位的法,应当通过渴爱杂染等教说方式来理解。它的果报,则要通过恶趣之苦以及在人间的种种不幸来理解。属于无学分位的法,应当通过无学的戒蕴等来理解其教说方式。它的果报,应当通过最上果和无余涅槃界来理解。至于其余的内容,在圣典中已经说过了。因为通过把握欲贪、瞋恚和上分结来讲杂染分位,又通过把握离贪以及把握无学来讲无学分位,所以说“依即将说到的……”。为了显示应当通过考察句与句义、推理、确定等方式来对法进行分别等种种考察,圣典中说“以观察……应当……”,所以注释书中说“以观察……显示了……”。巴利
Saṃkilesabhāgiyānaṃ taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā desanānayo veditabbo. Phalaṃ apāyadukkhena manussesu dobhaggiyena. Asekkhabhāgiyānaṃ asekkhehi sīlakkhandhādīhi desanānayo. Phalaṃ aggaphalena ca anupādisesāya ca nibbānadhātuyā veditabbaṃ. Itaresaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttameva. Kāmarāgabyāpādauddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanaggahaṇena saṃkilesabhāgiyānaṃ, virāgaggahaṇena asekkhaggahaṇeneva ca asekkhabhāgiyānaṃ vakkhamānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkhamānānaṃ…pe… vasenā’’ti. Padapadatthavicārayuttiniddhāraṇamukhena dhammavibhattiādivicāro kātabboti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vicayena…pe… tabbānī’’ti vuttanti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘vicayena…pe… dassetī’’ti vuttaṃ.
34 “如是”是对 evaṃ 的解释。“法”指所说的同类法。“通过共与不共的状态”,是指通过共相与特相来区分。所谓“二法共”,是指有这两种法,因为它们,同类法才被称为“共”。哪两种?名与事。其中,“名”指名施设,正是通过名的途径,从声音中领悟其意义。而声音只是以共相的方式把握那种意义,不是以特相的方式;因此,凡是能被言词表达的意义,由于必须依靠共相之名才能把握,所以称为“名共”。“事”指转起处,即诸法在哪里转起,对于所有那些法来说,那些被称为转起处的事就是共的。然而,由于这两者对于诸法的共性是本然、自性如此的,所以说“二法就是两种自性”。“同一相续流转”,是指在同一个相续中转起,因此他说“同所依”。因为对于见所断法,正如邪决定有情是它们的转起处,不定者也是如此,所以这两者都是同所依的。这一法则同样适用于其余诸法。因为身见、疑、戒禁取这些法虽然自性不同,但都不超出见所断的范围,所以它们达到了名的共相;而色贪等是修所断,因此他说“同一所断,名共”。然而,正如“诸事的共”即“事共”这一意义可得,同样,“与事共”即“事共”这一意义也可得;为了显示这一点,他说“同一俱生处,事共”。因为那些法虽然由于互相触等自性而彼此不同,但它们在某个事中转起,因此便与那个事称为共。在此,虽然善等名共也可得,但这里先不取它,而先就事共来解说,应这样了知。所谓“由对立等”,以“等”字包含了同果、俱有等。所谓“其余诸句”,是指在“凡夫的”等语句中。怎样呢?因为在那里,应这样解说:凡夫与入流者有,不来与阿拉汉无,等等。巴利
34.Evanti iti. Dhammeti vuttasabhāgadhamme. Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehīti sāmaññavisesena visiṭṭhehi. Dve dhammā sādhāraṇāti dve ime dhammā yehi sabhāgadhammā sādhāraṇā nāma honti. Katame dve? Nāmaṃ, vatthu ca. Tattha nāmaṃ nāmapaññatti, taṃmukheneva saddato tadatthāvagamo. Saddena ca sāmaññarūpeneva tathārūpassa atthassa gahaṇaṃ, na visesarūpena, tasmā saddavacanīyā atthā sādhāraṇarūpanāmāyattagahaṇīyatāya nāmasādhāraṇā vuttā. Vatthūti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yattha hi ye dhammā pavattanti, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ te dhammā sādhāraṇāti pavattiṭṭhānasaṅkhātānaṃ vatthūnaṃ sādhāraṇā. Yasmā panidaṃ dvayaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sādhāraṇabhāve pakatibhūtaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dve dhammāti duve pakatiyo’’ti. Ekasantatipatitatāyāti samānasantatipavattiyā. Tenāha ‘‘samānavatthukā’’ti. Dassanapahātabbānañhi yathā micchattaniyatasattā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ aniyatāpīti ubhaye hi te samānavatthukā. Esa nayo itaresupi. Sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsā hi bhinnasabhāvāpete dhammā dassanena pahātabbataṃ nātivattantīti te nāmasāmaññataṃ pattā, rūparāgādayo ca bhāvanāya pahātabbatanti āha ‘‘pahānekaṭṭhā nāmasādhāraṇā’’ti. Yathā pana ‘‘vatthūnaṃ sādhāraṇā vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti ayamattho labbhati, evaṃ ‘‘vatthunā sādhāraṇā vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti ayampi attho labbhatīti dassento ‘‘sahajekaṭṭhā vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti āha. Te hi aññamaññaṃ phusanādisabhāvato bhinnāpi yasmiṃ pavattanti, tena vatthunā sādhāraṇā nāma honti. Ettha ca labbhamānampi kusalādināmasādhāraṇaṃ anāmasitvā vatthusādhāraṇā tāva yojitāti veditabbā. Paṭipakkhādīhīti ādisaddena samānaphalatāsahabyatādike saṅgaṇhāti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘puthujjanassā’’tiādivākyesu. Kathaṃ? Tattha hi puthujjanassa, sotāpannassa ca sambhavato anāgāmino, arahato ca asambhavatotiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
“怎样是部分地把握?”——是以什么方式,那些被称为“共”的法被部分地把握?这里的意思是“对于某某、对于某某”。处于共相状态的法,才称为“共”。既然如此,为什么又说它们依邪决定、不定等的区分而有转起处呢?意思是:这不应说。若还须依区分来解说,那么岂非就不能说它们是“共”了吗?正是如此:所谓“共”,是就邪决定者与不定者这两者而言,那些法才是共的。因此他说:“并非因为对一切众生都共才叫共。”他以“因为”等语说明了其中的理由,由此显示:“某些法只对某些法是共的,对其他法则不共。”因此他说:“因为它们的转起处是特定的。”巴利
Kathaṃ te odhiso gahitāti kenākārena te ‘‘sādhāraṇā’’ti vuttadhammā bhāgaso gahitā. ‘‘Amukassa, amukassa cā’’ti ayañhettha attho. Sāmaññabhūtā dhammā sādhāraṇā nāma, evaṃ sante kathaṃ tesaṃ micchattaniyatāniyatādivasena vibhāgena pavattiṭṭhānatā vuccati, na vattabbanti adhippāyo. Atha vibhāgena taṃ vattabbaṃ, nanu te sādhāraṇāti na vattabbamevāti? Evaṃ sādhāraṇāti micchattaniyatānaṃ, aniyatānanti imesaṃ ubhayesaṃyeva te dhammā sādhāraṇā. Tenāha – ‘‘na sabbasattānaṃ sādhāraṇatāya sādhāraṇā’’ti. ‘‘Yasmā’’tiādinā tattha kāraṇamāha, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘keci dhammā kesañcideva dhammānaṃ sādhāraṇā honti, aññesaṃ asādhāraṇā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘paṭiniyatañhi tesaṃ pavattiṭṭhāna’’nti.
否则,由于转起之处不确定,它们可能对一切众生都是共同的,或者是不共同的;如果真是这样,那么“共同的”“不共同的”这种说法就根本不能成立,只能算是笼统的共相而已。所谓“正是这些法”,就是指那些被称为“共同的”法本身。所谓“如是”,就是按照“邪决定性者”等等所说的那种方式。它们是决定性的领域,转起之处已被限定。“Yopī”等话,是为了把以人为所依而说的意义清楚地显示出来。“Na hī”等话,则通过随转和相离两种方式阐明这个意义。其余诸法也是如此:在“修所断”等等当中也一样。巴利
Itarathāti aniyatapavattiṭṭhānatāya sabbesaṃ sādhāraṇā, asādhāraṇā vā siyuṃ, tathā sati. Tathā vohāroti ‘‘sādhāraṇā, asādhāraṇā’’ti ca ayaṃ vohāro sāmaññā eva na bhaveyya. Ete eva dhammāti ‘‘sādhāraṇā’’ti vuttadhammā eva. Evanti ‘‘micchattaniyatāna’’ntiādinā vuttappakārena. Niyatavisayā paricchinnappavattiṭṭhānā. ‘‘Yopī’’tiādi puggalādhiṭṭhānena vuttassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na hī’’tiādinā anvayato, byatirekato ca tamevatthaṃ vibhāveti. Sesepīti ‘‘bhāvanāpahātabbā’’ti evamādimhipi.
“各别决定”是指属于个人的。“其他的”是指非各别决定的。“如是”是指以不共的方式。某个法依某个法虽然可以是共的,但依另一个法也可以是不共的,所以他说“以共而不相离故”。因此他说“依取这个、那个”等。确实如此,被称为“法性”的初道位被显示出来,是就具有那样性质的多位圣者而言才是共的。“第一”是指第八者。“第二”是指入流者。“再次的第八者”是指在“第八者与不来者”这句里所说的第八者。因此他说“不来道位者”。从最胜果位开始逆数,初道位者是第八者;因为从道位和所断烦恼来说,所有道位者都像第八者一样,所以叫第八者;另一些人依词源解释说:“从一心刹那之后不再停留,所以是第八者。”
“有学”这个名称是共的,这是连接。在其余诸处,是指在所说的“可能、不可能”等非圣者中。因此他在圣典中说“依下劣、最胜、中间”。巴利
Paccattaniyatoti pāṭipuggaliko. Itarassāti apaccattaniyatassa. Tathāti asādhāraṇabhāvena. Koci dhammo kañci dhammaṃ upādāya sādhāraṇopi samāno tadaññaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇopi hotīti āha ‘‘sādhāraṇāvidhuratāyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ taṃ upādāyā’’tiādi. Tathā hi ‘‘dhammatā’’ti vuttapaṭhamamaggaṭṭhatā dīpitā, tādisānaṃ eva anekesaṃ ariyānaṃ vasena sādhāraṇāti . Paṭhamassāti aṭṭhamakassa. Dutiyassāti sotāpannassa. Puna aṭṭhamakassāti ‘‘aṭṭhamakassa, anāgāmissa cā’’ti ettha vuttaaṭṭhamakassa. Tenāha ‘‘anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassā’’ti. Aggaphalaṭṭhato paṭṭhāya paṭilomato gaṇiyamāno paṭhamamaggaṭṭho aṭṭhamako, maggaṭṭhatāya, pahīyamānakilesatāya ca sabbepi maggaṭṭhā aṭṭhamakā viyāti aṭṭhamakā, ‘‘ekacittakkhaṇato uddhaṃ na tiṭṭhatīti aṭṭhamako’’ti apare niruttinayena. ‘‘Sekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇanti sambandho. Itaresūti ‘‘bhabbābhabbā’’ti vuttesu anariyesu. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāyā’’ti.
“入决定”是指已进入决定的状态。“智增上者”是指智慧更殊胜的人。“如是种类的缘和合”是指智慧殊胜之缘的聚集。因为确实如此:正如依靠智慧之力就不会迟钝通达,行道的人同样能以安乐干涸烦恼。这乐行道、速通达,因具备它的人智慧增上,所以被称为观的立足处。巴利
Niyāmāvakkantiyāti avakkantaniyāmatāya. Ñāṇuttharassāti ñāṇādhikassa. Tathāvidhapaccayasamāyogeti ñāṇavisesapaccayasamavāye. Yathā hi ñāṇabalena dandhābhiññatā na hoti, evaṃ paṭipadāpaṭipannopi sukhena visosīyatīti. Sā hi sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā taṃsamaṅgino ñāṇuttarattā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānanti vuttā.
不离法的思惟就是法思惟;因为它是通过如理作意而运作起来的,所以是对诸法的思惟;或者,法是智慧的意思,因此,能带来法的思惟就是法思惟,意思是:作为思所成智之因的思惟。巴利
Dhammato anapetā cintā dhammacintā, yonisomanasikārena pavattitattā dhammesu cintā, dhammo vā ñāṇaṃ, tasmā dhammāvahā cintā dhammacintā, cintāmayañāṇassa hetubhūtā cintāti attho.
在巴利文中,通过“闻所成慧”这一表述,已经涵盖了“那些法是初善的……他多闻如是之法”等经文语句的含义;同样,通过“如理作意”这一表述,已经涵盖了“他如理作意‘无常’”等所说的方便作意;通过“正见”这一表述,已经涵盖了“他修习依远离的正见”等所说的正见。为了说明这一点,所以说道:“atha kho……dassetu”。至于其余的,如“法善说性”等,也是如此。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃ sutamayapaññāggahaṇena ‘‘ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā…pe… tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā hontī’’tiādi (a. ni. 8.2) suttapadasaṅgaho attho pariggahito, tathā yonisomanasikāraggahaṇena ‘‘so ‘anicca’nti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādinā vutto upāyamanasikāro pariggahito. Sammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena ‘‘sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’ntiādinā vuttā sammādiṭṭhi pariggahitāti dassento āha ‘‘atha kho…pe… dassetu’’nti. Sesanti ‘‘dhammasvākkhātatā’’ti evamādi.
对于前面没有解释过含义的地方,为了说明善知识性所引生的处净信和心寂静是果,所以说“善士……足处”。为了说明因为自身正修,多厌弃罪恶、厌离等,所以说“义……足处”。为了说明善说的法从开始一直到最终都是一切成就圆满的因,所以说“法善说性……足处”。因为善根的培植以等至为终结。以僧伽的良善,即因僧伽的良善状态,因僧伽的敬顺状态,因“善哉,尊者”这句话被接受的状态。其余的很容易理解。巴利
Yassa ca pubbe attho na saṃvaṇṇito, tattha kalyāṇamittatāya āyatanagato pasādo, cittavūpasamo ca phalanti dassento ‘‘sappurisa…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Attasammāpaṇihitattā pāpajegucchinibbidādibahulova hotīti dassento āha ‘‘attha…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Dhammo svākkhāto ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā sabbasampattipāripūrihetūti dassento ‘‘dhammasvākkhātatā…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Kusalamūlaropanā hi samāpattipariyosānāti . Saṅghasuṭṭhutāya saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvāya saṅghassa sappatissatāya ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvāya. Itaraṃ suviññeyyameva.
9. 反转理趣分别的注释巴利
9. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
35 在“有正见者……已灭尽”这一句里,就像按道正见来说明它的含义一样,按业自性正见和业道正见等也能得到这个含义,因为这里本来讲的就是业道。“以所说的方式”是指像“仍未解脱”和“不解脱”所说的那样。“由于邪执的力量”是指把不是正自觉者执为正自觉者,把不能导出的执为能导出,把不存在执为存在,把非圣执为圣,也就是以颠倒的方式执取。“邪胜解”是指不如实的信解,或者不如实的决定。已生起的愚痴本身就是邪解脱智见,它们是这样联系起来的。巴利
35.Sammādiṭṭhissa…pe… nijjiṇṇā bhavatīti ettha yathā maggasammādiṭṭhivasenattho vutto, evaṃ kammassakatākammapathasammādiṭṭhīnampi vasena attho labbhateva. Kammapathakathā hesā. Yathāvuttenākārenāti ‘‘avimuttāva samānā’’ti, ‘‘avimuttiya’’nti ca vuttappakārena. Micchābhinivesavasenāti asammāsambuddhaṃ eva sammāsambuddhoti, aniyyānikaṃ eva niyyānikoti, asantaṃ eva pana santanti, anariyaṃ eva ariyoti viparītābhinivesavasena . Micchādhimokkhoti ayāthāvapasādo, ayāthāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ vā. Uppannamoho micchāvimuttiñāṇadassananti sambandho.
36 36. 诤论、随诤论、诤论随诤论,意思是执取那些诤论。诤论随转,是指诤论及其过失的随转。巴利
36. Vādānaṃ vā anuvādā vādānuvādā, tesaṃ vādānaṃ upādāti attho. Vādānupavattiyoti vādānaṃ dosānaṃ anupavattiyo.
以对治方式翻转所谓欲乐耽著与自我折磨这两边。巴利
Antadvayaparivattananti kāmasukhaattakilamathānuyogasaṅkhātassa antadvayassa paṭipakkhavasena parivattanaṃ.
在这些情况中,也就是在“导出的法是他们的非法,安乐是他们的非法”这些情况中。依所说的方法:如果自我折磨、令自己受苦是法,那么与法相违的就是非法,而与苦相违的就是安乐。这样一来,他们所证的禅那、道、果之乐,以及无过失地受用资具之乐,在他们那里就都成了非法——应当这样说明。关于“任何法”等语句,这是对经文剩余部分的探求。这里“任何法”指的是无论哪一种法——善的或不善的,可意的或不可意的。“喜爱或执取”是指内心喜爱它,或者以见解去执取它。那种法的对立面,就是指他所喜爱或所执取的那种法本身的对立面。当他将那不悦的法当作所喜爱的法来对待时,通过那对立面来翻转教说,这就是反转理趣。因此说“阐明对立面的特征”。巴利
Etesupi vāresūti ‘‘niyyāniko dhammo tesaṃ adhammo, sukho tesaṃ adhammo’’ti ca imesu vāresu. Vuttanayenāti yadi attaparitāpanaṃ attano dukkhāpanaṃ dhammo, dhammassa paṭiviruddho adhammo siyā, dukkhassa ca sukhapaṭiviruddhanti jhānamaggaphalasukhassa, anavajjapaccayaparibhogasukhassa ca tesaṃ adhammabhāvo āpajjatīti evaṃ vattabbā. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ vā panātiādinā’’ti idaṃ avasesapāṭhāmasanaṃ. Ettha yaṃ yaṃ vā pana dhammanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā dhammaṃ, kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rocayati vā upagacchati vāti cittena rocati, diṭṭhiyā upagacchatīti. Tassa tassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkhoti tassa tassa rucitassa, upagatassa vā dhammassa yo paṭipakkho nāma. Svassa aniṭṭhato ajjhāpanno bhavatīti yo dhammo assa rucitassa, upagatassa vā dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkato abbhupagato hoti, tena paṭipakkhena desanāya parivattanaṃ parivattano hāroti attho. Tenāha ‘‘paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāvetī’’ti.
10. 同义语理趣分别的注释巴利
10. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
37 “互相”(aññamaññehi)就是“以不同的、不同的方式”。“在后”(āyatiṃ)是指在省察的时候。“怎样”(kathañci)是指无论以哪一种方式——如果以先前所说的方式不能通达,就以另一种方式来通达,这是它的用意。接着是指出同义语,前后相连。一切处都这样理解。“在那时”(tasmiṃ khaṇe)就是指同义语被说出的那个当下。“心散乱者”(vikkhittacittānaṃ)是指心被种种不同的所缘散乱的人。“分心他事者”(aññavihitānaṃ)是指心里想着别的事情的人。那么,为什么还要用另一种方式来领悟那个意义呢?难道用前一种方式说出来,不就能使那意义坚固吗?针对这个质疑,才说了“teneva”等。其中,“与那些人相异的其他人”(tadaññesanti)是指相对于那些心散乱等的人,另外那些能够正确领受第一句话的人。“在那里”(tatthāti)是指对已经说过的话再加以重复。因为已经证得了那个意义,为了避免重复,便通过各种不同的想,来表明“这个音声也是这个意义的能诠,那个音声也是这个意义的能诠”。这就是对应当开示的各种意义,在心中确立、安置。“在那里”(tatthāti)即就法无碍解与词无碍解而言。播下种子(bījāvāpanaṃ)就是成就其因。巴利
37.Aññamaññehīti aññehi aññehi. Āyatinti paccavekkhaṇakāle. Kathañcīti yena kenaci pakārena, paṭhamaṃ vuttena pariyāyena appaṭivijjhanto aparena pariyāyena paṭivijjheyyāti adhippāyo. Pariyāyavacanaṃ niddisatīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Tasmiṃ khaṇeti pariyāyavacanassa vuttakkhaṇe. Vikkhittacittānanti ārammaṇantarehi vividhakhittacittānaṃ . Aññavihitānanti aññaṃ cintentānaṃ. Kasmā pana aññena pariyāyena tadatthāvabodhanaṃ, nanu tena vutte daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hotīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tenevā’’tiādi. Tattha tadaññesanti tehi vikkhittacittādīhi aññesaṃ, yehi paṭhamaṃ vacanaṃ sammadeva gahitaṃ. Tatthāti vuttavacaneneva punappunaṃ vacane. Adhigataanvatthatāya punarutti parivajjanatthaṃ visesanabhāvena tāhi tāhi saññāhipi ayampi saddo imassatthassa vācako, ayampi saddo imassatthassa vācakoti paññāpanehi. Desetabbassa tassa tassa atthassa attano citte upanibandhanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ. Tatthāti dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāyaṃ. Bījāvāpanaṃ hetusampādanaṃ.
注疏者在世尊的方便开示中说了许多利益之后,现在为了说明“正因为如来自己就是正自觉者,所以诸佛以佛陀的示现,用种种方式开示法”,于是接着说“何必多说”等话。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavato pariyāyadesanāyaṃ anekāni payojanāni vatvā idāni attano sammāsambuddhatāya evaṃ tathāgatā buddhalīlāya anekehi pariyāyehi dhammaṃ desentīti dassento ‘‘kiṃ bahunā’’tiādimāha.
在巴利圣典中,先说“所谓爱求,就是对当前之事的希求”,以此显示它取现在的对象;然后为了再显示它也取未来的对象,又说了“或更殊胜的”等话,因此总结说“渴爱与爱求是以未来和现在之事为对象”。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pihā nāma yā vattamānassa atthassa patthanā’’ti paccuppannavisayataṃ dassetvā puna anāgatavisayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyataraṃ vā’’tiādi vuttanti ‘‘anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayā taṇhā pihā’’ti āha.
在这句话里,对于“期待事情成就”这个词,正是从“爱求”这个含义出发,说明了它是以未来和现在之事为对象的。巴利
Atthanipphattipaṭipālanāti imasmiṃ vā pade pihāya evatthavasena anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayabhāvadīpanato.
这些法只是被“法所缘”所含摄,因此就归入“法所缘”之中。这里说的“二十四句”,是依照依家忧近伺等四类、每类六种,合计二十四种分类。巴利
Dhammārammaṇeneva saṅgahitā ‘‘dhammārammaṇa’’ntveva gahaṇaṃ gatā. Catuvīsati padānīti ettha gehasitadomanassūpavicārādīnaṃ catunnaṃ chakkānaṃ vasena catuvīsa koṭṭhāsā.
38 正是以那种希求的方式而说的“法喜”等语,这里的意思是:那同一个以希求方式生起的渴爱,借着希望等异名被说出时,对于色等诸法,以欢喜之义就是“法喜”;对于这些法,以珍爱之义就是“法爱”;以吞下、完全确立而安住之义,就是“法耽著”。巴利
38.Sāyeva patthanākārena dhammanandītiādimāhāti ettha ayamattho – sā eva patthanākārena pavattiyā āsādipariyāyena vuttā taṇhā rūpādidhammesu nandanaṭṭhena dhammanandī. Tesaṃ eva piyāyanaṭṭhena dhammapemaṃ. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhānato dhammajjhosānanti.
用“以此”这个词,不只是要按“慧是了知”这类特有的说法来说明它的同义词,还应当按增上等共通的说法来说明它的同义词——这就是这段话的意思。所谓“依此方式”,就是指依这种异门之说。这里并不是只显示“如是世尊”这类经典句式能成就教说的意义。“力已圆满到达者”,是指在十种如来力中已经到达成就、圆满。“得无所畏者”,是指对正觉、断障、说法、特别教诫这四方面,已经获得、证得了那四种称为无畏善巧状态的智,所以叫得无所畏。巴利
Imināpīti na kevalaṃ ‘‘paññā pajānanā’’tiādiāveṇikapariyāyeneva vevacanaṃ vattabbaṃ, atha kho iminā ādhipateyyādisādhāraṇapariyāyenapi vevacanaṃ vattabbanti attho. Imināva nayenāti etena pariyāyavacanena . Na hi desanatthasādhanaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādipāḷinayadassananti dasseti. Balanipphattigatotiādīsu dasasu tathāgatabalesu nipphattiṃ pāripūriṃ gato. Sambodhipahānantarāyadesanā visesacodanāsu visāradabhāvasaṅkhātāni cattāri ñāṇāni patto adhigatoti vesārajjappatto.
以特别的方式超越了贪等志向,所以叫“已越志向者”。因为远离了过去因的简别等一切简别,所以称为无简别的涅槃;又因为具有不动法性,或者从功德来说不可简别、不可算计,已经到达、已经进入,所以叫“无简别到达者”。其余内容很容易理解。“应拔出”就是应当提取出来。巴利
Lobhajjhāsayādiajjhāsayaṃ visesena ativattoti ajjhāsayavītivatto. Atītahetusaṅkhepādisaṅkhepavirahitatāya asaṅkhepasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ, akuppadhammatāya guṇehi vā asaṅkhepaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ gato upagatoti asaṅkhepagato. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Uddheyyanti uddharitabbaṃ.
在法随念里,应当这样理解它的含义,这就是上下文的关系。它从轮回之苦中救出,又以寂静的快乐令人欢喜,因此叫“彼岸”。巴利
Dhammānussatiyaṃ evaṃ attho daṭṭhabboti sambandho. Saṃsāradukkhato pāti, santena sukhena rameti cāti vā pāraṃ.
“过去未曾有过”是指以前从未生起过。这就说明它是恒常的,因为它不会被任何天神之类的干扰所侵入、所触恼。巴利
Abhūtapubbattāti anuppannapubbattā, tenassa niccataṃva vibhāveti kenaci devatopasaggādinā anupasajjanīyattā anupasaṭṭhattā.
“Duppassa”也是巴利经文里的词,意思是难以证得。所谓“以功德的光辉与芳香”,是指凭借功德的光辉,以及功德的芳香。巴利
‘‘Duppassa’’ntipi pāḷi, duradhigamanti attho. Guṇasobhāsurabhibhāvenāti guṇehi sobhāya, sugandhibhāvena ca.
就像一个人能刹那射中目标,靠的是技艺纯熟,在漆黑的深夜中借着刹那的闪电之光,能射中极为微细、远在远处的靶子;同样,圣弟子靠戒的圆满成就,以一次证悟便通达极为微细的涅槃——也就是四谛法。因此说“技艺与戒,如刹那射性”。这里所说的“世间”,应当只视为举例说明,因为对出世间法的观察也是以此为依托的。巴利
Yathā akkhaṇavedhī puggalo sippanipphattiyā rattandhakāratimisāya acirakkhaṇālokena atisukhumampi dūragataṃ lakkhaṃ vijjhati, evaṃ ariyasāvako sīlasampattiyā atisukhumaṃ nibbānaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ ekapaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhatīti āha ‘‘sippañca sīlaṃ akkhaṇavedhitāyā’’ti. Lokikanti nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ lokuttaradhammaolokanassāpi adhiṭṭhānabhāvato.
11. 施设理趣分别的注释巴利
11. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
39 世尊的自性法谈:自己的体性就是自性,由自性而生起,或者从自性而来,所以叫自性;那本身就是法谈,所以叫自性法谈,意思是诸佛最胜的法谈。以它为方式而进行的法开示,虽然谈和开示本来没有差别,这里只是依照隐喻上成立的区分才这样说,或者也可以按部分与整体的区分来理解。因此说:什么是本性之谈的开示?四圣谛。这其实是把义理和开示当作没有差别而说的隐喻。那是对那个开示的安立。这就是施设理趣,只用简略的方式说明了施设理趣本身的样子。那,就是指前面所说的开示。如此如此,意思是诸谛应当被开示的方式是怎样,就按那样。它们应当怎样被开示呢?以应当遍知等方式。如所意欲,就是符合所意欲的,意思是随顺应被教化的有缘众生觉悟的意向。义,就是应当被开示的义理,或者就是指苦等义理。放置,就是确立。因此注释书中说四种经的安置等等。巴利
39.Bhagavato sābhāvikadhammakathāyāti attano bhāvo sabhāvo, sabhāvena nibbattā, tato vā āgatāti sābhāvikā, sā eva dhammakathāti sābhāvikadhammakathā, buddhānaṃ sāmukkaṃsikadhammakathāti attho , tāya karaṇabhūtāya dhammadesanāya anaññattepi kathādesanānaṃ upacārasiddhena bhedenevaṃ vuttaṃ, avayavasamudāyavibhāgena vā. Tenāha ‘‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā? Cattāri saccānī’’ti. Idañhi atthassa desanāya abhedopacāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Tassā desanāya paññāpanā. Ayaṃ paññattihāroti saṅkhepeneva paññattihārassa sarūpamāha. Sāti yathāvuttadesanā. Tathā tathāti yathā yathā saccāni desetabbāni, tathā tathā. Kathañcetāni desetabbāni? Pariññeyyādippakārena. Yathādhippetanti adhippetānurūpaṃ, bodhaneyyabandhavānaṃ bodhanādhippāyānukūlanti attho. Atthanti desetabbatthaṃ, dukkhādiatthameva vā. Nikkhipatīti patiṭṭhāpeti. Yato ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’tiādi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā) aṭṭhakathāsu vuccati.
其中,“在那里”的意思是“在安置的开示里”。“属于道的一分”意思是“被排除在苦谛之外”,这就是所要表达的意思。巴利
Tatthāti nikkhepadesanāyanti attho. Maggapakkhiyāti dukkhasaccato bahikatāti adhippāyo.
在那一处:指在被称为“有”等的处所中。如前所说的开示:指以对四食的贪等为切入点、阐明轮回流转的那类开示。巴利
Yasmiṃ ṭhāneti yasmiṃ bhavādisaṅkhāte ṭhāne. Yathāvuttā desanāti caturāhārapaṭibaddharāgādimukhena vaṭṭadīpanī vuttappakārā desanā.
41 “以三转的方式”在这里也要和“于诸谛”连起来理解。“遍知施设”,他说的——应当这样连接。“内心喜悦”和“得定”这两个词,通过指出所缘是内在的等方式,说明了具备定之殊胜的内心喜悦状态的修习。因为单单“内”这个词,也可以用于内在、内在所缘等情形。而具备内心喜悦之殊胜的定,说明殊胜的心安住;为了显示这个意思,所以说了“具备定之殊胜的”等话。巴利
41.Teparivaṭṭavasenāti etthāpi ‘‘saccesū’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Pariññāpaññattīti āhāti sambandho. Ajjhattarato, samāhitoti padadvayena samādhānavisiṭṭhaṃ ajjhattaratatābhāvanaṃ dīpeti gocarajjhattatādīpanato. Kevalo hi ajjhattasaddo ajjhattajjhattagocarajjhattesupi vattati. Ajjhattaratatāvisiṭṭhañca samādhānaṃ sātisayaṃ cittaṭṭhitiṃ dīpetīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘samādhānavisiṭṭhassā’’tiādinā.
以黏着之义,就是以黏着之义。同样地,以那种方式看见,就是指即使并非真实存在,也像有善相的东西那样展示自己。薄福者,就是失运者。巴利
Āsajjanaṭṭhenāti āsaṅganaṭṭhena. Tathā dassananti atathābhūtassāpi bhabbarūpassa viya attano vidaṃsanaṃ. Alakkhikoti vilakkhiko.
“欲”是指欲界的法。“色”是指色界的法。“出离”:对欲界法来说,色界法是出离;对色界法来说,无色界法是出离。这样,它们就是有更上之处的本质。“如此”:就像有为法有出离,以及断除烦恼的圣道以无为界为所缘,所以无为界确实存在;同样,通过这里所说的理由,也表明无为界确实存在。“在某处之境”:这是针对无为界说的。“不颠倒之义”:就是真实之义。因为在“贤友,当这个自我完全具备五种欲乐、充分享受时,到这个程度,这个自我就达到了最上的现法涅槃”,以及“具有现法涅槃状态”等说法中,这是比喻性的用法。就像“狮子声”这个说法:在“像狮子一样的年轻人”等表达中,是以比喻的方式用在年轻人等身上,而只有在指称兽王的真实义之境时,才被如实地看待;同样,“涅槃”这个词,虽然也以比喻的方式用在具备欲乐、色界禅那等状态上,但在某一种境中,它就是不变的真实义。而那个不颠倒之义的境,就是无为界。为了说明:对于像看掌中的余甘子一样,能现前亲见所知之境的人,只有导师的话在这里才是准量,所以说“这有什么好推理思择的呢”等话。“为了所承诺之义的成就,而作开示与施设”这个结论,就是针对这个说的。巴利
Kāmānanti kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ. Rūpānanti rūpāvacaradhammānaṃ. Nissaraṇanti kāmānaṃ rūpāvacaradhammā nissaraṇaṃ, tesaṃ arūpāvacaradhammā nissaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ taṃsabhāvānanti sauttarasabhāvānaṃ. Tathāti yathā saṅkhatadhammānaṃ nissaraṇabhāvato, kilesasamucchedakassa ariyamaggassa ārammaṇabhāvato ca attheva asaṅkhatā dhātu, tathā vuccamānenāpi kāraṇena attheva asaṅkhatā dhātūti dasseti. Katthaci visayeti asaṅkhatadhātuṃ sandhāya vadati. Aviparītatthoti bhūtattho. ‘‘Yato kho bho ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho bho ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hoti (dī. ni. 1.94), sapakaṭṭhanibbānabhāvino’’ti ca evamādīsu upacāravuttisabbhāvato. Yathā taṃ sīhasaddoti yathā ‘‘sīho māṇavako’’tiādinā māṇavakādīsu upacāravuttinā vattamāno migarāje bhūtatthavisaye diṭṭho, evaṃ nibbānasaddopi kāmaguṇarūpajjhānasamaṅgitāsu upacāravuttiyā vattamāno katthaci visaye aviparītattho. Yattha ca visaye aviparītattho, sā asaṅkhatā dhātu. Hatthatale saāmalakaṃ viya ñeyyaṃ paccakkhato passantassa ekappamāṇassa satthuvacanamevettha pamāṇanti dassento ‘‘kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāyā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Paṭiññātassa atthassa siddhiyā pakāsanāpaññattī’’ti nigamaṃ sandhāyāhāti.
12. 契入理趣分别的注释巴利
12. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
42 42. “以诸根”中的“以”是表示工具的格,就像“以道而行”这类说法,以及“以斧头砍”这类说法一样。“入”就是进入。巴利
42.Indriyehīti karaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ ‘‘maggena gacchatī’’tiādīsu viya, ‘‘pharasunā chindatī’’ti evamādīsu viya ca. Otaraṇāti anuppavesanā.
在慧蕴中,以摄归的方式,正思惟也是如此——这是句子的连接方式。为了说明这一点:对于致力于增上心的人来说,当信等(信、精进、念、定)正在起辅助作用时,慧才完成“见”的作用,因此说“信……等已说”。“而非有分”:这是为了说明有分并非那些行生起的原因。巴利
Paññākkhandhe saṅgaṇhanavasena sammāsaṅkappo viyāti yojanā. Adhicittaanuyuttānaṃ saddahanussahanupaṭṭhānasamādahanehi saddhādīsu upakarontesu eva paññā dassanakiccaṃ sādhetīti dassento ‘‘saddhā..pe… vuttānī’’ti āha. No ca bhavaṅgāti tesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ pavattikāraṇatābhāvaṃ dasseti.
43 “如所说的”,就是指前面说过的“所依”。这是从思的角度来说渴爱,因为渴爱和思一起生起。巴利
43.Tathā vuttoti ‘‘nissayo’’ti vutto. Cetanāsīsena taṇhaṃ eva vadati cetanāsahacaraṇato.
“染着者”是指贪欲还没有被圣道断除的人。一个人被称为“染着者”,就是因为他还有贪欲;这里说与他的贪欲相关联的乐受,是因为他对那种乐受还有随眠。所以他说“于乐受……等等”。其余几种受也是同样的道理。因此他说“如是”等。巴利
Rattassāti maggena asamucchinnarāgassa. Yena puggalo ‘‘ratto’’ti vuccati, tassa rāgassa sambandhinī sukhā vedanā vuttā tattha tassa anusayanato. Tenāha ‘‘sukhāya…pe… vutta’’nti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tenāha ‘‘tathā’’tiādi.
那些根就是指乐根、喜根、舍根。针对“属于行蕴”这个说法,他说“这里以受为首而说思”。因为受并不属于行蕴。为了说明“由于渴爱”“由于见”可以是工具格,他说“由于渴爱”等。现在,为了说明“由于渴爱”等词按工具格来理解的含义,他说“或者如同”等。其中,“其余诸法”指除去渴爱之外的其他共通法。“在渴爱成为依止的状态时”,就是说当渴爱成为这些法的依止时。巴利
Tāni eva indriyānīti sukhasomanassupekkhindriyāni. ‘‘Saṅkhārapariyāpannānī’’ti vacanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘idha vedanāsīsena cetanā vuttā’’ti. Na hi vedanā saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannā hoti. Taṇhāya, diṭṭhiyāti ca upayoge karaṇavacananti dassento ‘‘taṇhāyā’’tiādimāha. Idāni upayogavaseneva ‘‘taṇhāyā’’tiādīnaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sesadhammānanti taṇhāvajjitaavisiṭṭhadhammānaṃ. Taṇhāya nissayabhāveti yadā taṇhā tesaṃ nissayo hoti.
当渴爱成为其余诸法的缘时,就是说当其余诸法以渴爱为缘而存在时。通过“依于业生身”这句话,因为有了身轻安,也就包含了依于受等三蕴的情况。“成为原因”是指辗转相续的因性。“由于渴爱与见的取著”,是指由见的取著,以及由与见相应的渴爱的取著。巴利
Taṇhāya sesadhammānaṃ paccayabhāveti yadā sesadhammā taṇhāpaccayā honti. ‘‘Karajakāyasannissitā’’ti iminā vedanādikkhandhattayanissitāpi gahitā kāyappassaddhibhāvato. Kāraṇabhāvanti paramparahetubhāvaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhiupayenāti diṭṭhiupayena ca diṭṭhisahagatataṇhāupayena ca.
“到来”在这里就是指来到此世,“离去”是指死后投生到下一世。经中之所以说“到来和离去也不存在”,是为了把这两个词所说的意思表达得更清楚。这里说的“去”(huranti)等,是指门与所缘的法;因为要藉近、远的门和所缘加以遮止之后才执取它们,所以才这样称说。这里,在门中生起的诸法,是以“在两者之间”这个词的涵义来说的。而在“四阵列理趣”中,非根所系的色法也是那样说的——因为它们作为因,是无间缘,也是亲依止缘。那些被执取为“我”的法,由于识等诸法不存在,就被说成是不生的法,这就是它的意思。“对不依著者,没有动摇”等,是从逆序显示缘的性质。为了说明这一点,经中先说了“这就是苦的边际,即缘起”;接着,针对“难道不是‘以无明为缘而有行’等所说的缘起吗?”这样的问难,为了显示前面所说的缘起的本质,就用“它有两种”等,从世间和出世间两方面来分别缘起。所谓“如此施设”,是为了达到离贪解脱;而那种存在,就是出世间的缘起。巴利
‘‘Āgatītiidhāgati, gatīti peccabhavo’’ti padadvayena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘āgatigatīpi na bhavantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha huranti dvārārammaṇadhammā dassitā āsannadūrabhāvehi dvārārammaṇehi vinivattetvā gahitattā. Idha dvārappavattadhammā ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti padassa atthabhāvena vuttā. Catubyūhahāre pana anindriyabaddharūpadhammā tathā vuttā. Kāraṇabhūtena anantarapaccayabhūtena, upanissayapaccayabhūtena ca. Ye dhammā upādāya ‘‘attā’’ti samaññā, tesaṃ viññāṇādidhammānaṃ abhāvena anuppādadhammataṃ āpāditattāti attho. ‘‘Anissitassa calitaṃ natthī’’tiādinā paṭilomato paccayabhāvo dassitoti dassento pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘esevanto dukkhassāti paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti vatvā nanu ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādiko paṭiccasamuppādoti codanaṃ sandhāya yathāvuttassa paṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so duvidho’’tiādinā lokiyalokuttaravasena paṭiccasamuppādo vibhatto. Tadatthatāyāti vītarāgavimuttiatthatāya. Tabbhāvanti lokuttarapaṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ.
13. 净化理趣分别的注释巴利
13. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
45 “净化”这个词,当有人这样问的时候,为了把所问的意义像放在手掌上的余甘子果一样直观地展示出来,就去除杂草、清除杂芜,把它揭示出来,通过去掉对那个对象的无知、疑惑等污垢来净化。这样净化的时候,由于对词的意义作了无分别的假说,就称为“净化词句”。因此他说“名为净化词句”。这里,净化就是指回答,因为他说“由于回答了那个意义”。“开始”就是发端,也就是教说中所阐明的意义。因此他说“尚未……因为令觉悟”等。这里所说的净化,就是通过教说的力量,让被覆盖的意义显露出来。为了用比喻说明这个意义,接着说了“陷入无知者”等。巴利
45.Sodhetināmāti pucchitamatthaṃ hatthatale ṭhapitaāmalakaṃ viya paccakkhato dassento niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā vivaranto tabbisayaaññāṇasaṃsayādimalāpanayanena sodheti, evaṃ sodhento ca padassa atthena abhedopacāraṃ katvā ‘‘padaṃ sodheti’’cceva vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘padaṃ sodheti nāmā’’ti. Pucchāya vissajjanamevettha sodhananti āha ‘‘tadatthassa vissajjanato’’ti. Ārabhīyatīti ārambho, desanāya pakāsiyamāno attho. Tenāha ‘‘na tāva…pe… pabodhitattā’’ti. Idha sodhanaṃ nāma paṭicchannarūpassa atthassa desanānubhāvena vivaṭabhāvakaraṇanti tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aññāṇapakkhandāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
14. 确立理趣分别的注释巴利
14. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
46 应当持守,意思是应当保持、应当辨识。前面已经说过:“因为通过共相与别相的安立而成为假名,所以不能固定成立”等等。巴利
46.Dhārayitabbāti upadhāretabbā, upalakkhitabbāti attho. Vuttameva ‘‘sāmaññavisesakappanāya vohārabhāvena anavaṭṭhānato’’tiādinā (netti. aṭṭha. 14).
那种种果报,就是地狱等种种果报。已去,就是已经去了。生,就是一种生类。因为以同类的方式混在一起,所以叫生,也就是投生。死后,就是命终之后。由于增盛,是因为寻思繁多;也有人说是由于增盛,即因为常见等而增盛。令生于阿修罗类的业,就是令阿修罗类出生之业。巴利
Taṃ taṃ phalanti nirayādiṃ taṃ taṃ phalaṃ. Añcitāti gatā. Yonīti ekajāti. Samānavasena missībhavati etāyāti hi yoni, upapatti. Peccāti maritvā. Ussannatāyāti vitakkabahulatāya. ‘‘Ussannattā’’tipi vadanti. Sassatādīhi vā ussannattā. Asurajātiyā nibbattāpanako asurajātinibbattanako.
“算计”就是慧。因为这是以慧为主导的修习,所以说“通过审察而修习对治”。巴利
Saṅkhāti paññā. Paññāpadhānā ca bhāvanāti āha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhāya paṭipakkhabhāvanāyā’’ti.
47 地因为广布而称为地。因为保持自性、没有有情、没有生命,所以称为界。能吸收、能湿润,所以称为水界。以热的状态、炽热的状态,或者燃烧的状态,所以称为火界。以推动的状态、快速行进的状态,或者鼓动的状态,所以称为风界。头发等是二十个部分,或者二十种行相。因为头发等以粗硬相为主,所以说头发等具有粗硬相。巴利
47. Patthaṭabhāvena pathavī. Sabhāvadhāraṇaṭṭhena, nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena ca dhātu. Āpīyati, appāyatīti vā āpo. Tejanavasena tikkhatāvasena, dahanavasena vā tejo. Vāyanavasena vegagamanavasena, samudīraṇavasena vā vāyo. Vīsati ākārāti kesādayo vīsati koṭṭhāsā, pakārā vā. Kakkhaḷalakkhaṇādhikatāya kesādī kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā vuttā.
各自单独的地界部分,就是只相当于地界的那一部分,它的意思纯粹是无我、无实的法。这里“令热恼”是指:超出身体正常状态而生起的灼热,叫热恼;以燃烧身体的方式持续产生的大灼热,叫大热恼,这就是这两者的区别。“由此而衰老”的意思是:因为一日疟等衰老性疾病而衰老,这个说法也讲得通。他们说:“把酥油加热一百次,再放进水里取出,这就是百炼酥油。”味、血、肉、脂肪、筋、骨、骨髓,就是“味等”。有些人去掉筋,把精液说成第七界。“远离”是指变得不同,也就是状态不相似。具体说,被称为段食的食物在消化过程中,就像被动物吃下后变成粪尿等状态那样,自己也产生与原本不同的味等,进入不同的状态,这就叫“变成远离”。同样,味等也进入血液等其他部分。因此说“以味等的状态而成为远离”。巴利
Pāṭiyekko pathavīdhātukoṭṭhāsoti pathavīkoṭṭhāsamatto, attasuññadhammamattoti attho. Santappatīti ettha sarīrapakatimatikkamitvā uṇhabhāvo santāpo, sarīradahanavasena pavatto mahādāho, ayametesaṃ viseso. Yena ca jīrīyatīti ekāhikādijarārogena jarīyatīti ca attho yujjati. ‘‘Satavāraṃ tāpetvā tāpetvā udake pakkhipitvā uddhaṭasappi satadhotasappī’’ti vadanti. Rasarudhiramaṃsamedanhāruaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjā rasādayo. Keci nhāruṃ apanetvā sukkaṃ sattamaṃ dhātuṃ vadanti. Vivekanti visuṃbhāvaṃ, visadisabhāvanti attho. Vatthusaṅkhāto hi āhāro pariṇāmaṃ gacchanto pāṇabhakkhagahaṇipadaniya muttakarīsabhāvehi viya attanāpi visadisarasasaṅkhātaṃ visuṃbhāvaṃ nibbattento tabbhāvaṃ gacchatīti vuccati, tathā rasādayopi rudhirādikoṭṭhāsaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatī’’ti.
从“自相”的角度来说,是因为应当被认定为不清净的状态。巴利
Sabhāvalakkhaṇatoti asucibhāvena lakkhitabbato.
48 真实味相:所谓“味”,就是可以被品尝的;也就是应当被通达的自性。自己的味就是自味,真实的味就是真实自味;因为真实自味本身应当被标记,所以称为“相”,合起来就是“真实味相”。或者说,“真实味相”指的是不颠倒的、属于自身生起的作用,以及逼迫性的相。由于无明,人无法知道“这是作用,这是相”,无明遮蔽、覆盖、完全包围而安住,阻止了关于它的智生起,所以说它是不令知、不令通达。因此说“不令知、不令通达”。这是它的作用,所以从作用的角度来说。由此,无明被称为“不通达味”。在这里生起,就是“生”,也就是生起之处。虽然在灭道中,无明并不以它为所缘,但对于想了解灭道的人来说,由于无明以覆盖那灭道的方式,在非灭道中作为执取灭道的因生起,所以说它在非灭道中生起;那些非灭道也是无明的生起处,其余诸法则是以所缘为因。巴利
48.Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇanti rasitabboti raso, paṭivijjhitabbo sabhāvo, attano raso saraso, yāthāvo saraso, yāthāvasaraso yāthāvasaraso eva lakkhitabbattā lakkhaṇanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Atha vā yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇanti aviparītaṃ attano pavattisaṅkhātaṃ kiccañceva pīḷanasaṅkhātaṃ lakkhaṇañca. ‘‘Idaṃ kiccaṃ, idaṃ lakkhaṇa’’nti avijjāhetu ñātuṃ na sakkoti, tabbisayañāṇuppattiṃ nivārentī chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhatīti vuttā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detī’’ti. Tayidamassā kiccanti kiccato kathitā. Kathitāti ca vuttā, yato ca avijjā asampaṭivedharasāti vuccati. Jāyati etthāti jāti, uppattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yadipi nirodhamagge avijjā ārammaṇaṃ na karoti, te pana jānitukāmassa tappaṭicchādanavasena anirodhamaggesu nirodhamaggaggahaṇassa kāraṇabhāvena pavattamānā tattha uppajjatīti vuccati, tesampi avijjāya uppattiṭṭhānatā hoti, itaresaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena cāti.
义与非义,就是有利与无利。不过在《迷惑冰消》里说的是“义义”,那里“义”本身就是“义义”,这是为了显示义的不颠倒,所以用第二个“义”字来作限定。因为智不会把非义执取为“义”。“因与非因”在这里也应当这样理解。或者,“义义”是重复的说法,是为了表明一切义都清清楚楚,意思是“果就是果”;在“利益”的同义词中也是同样的道理。“Nti”指的是义与非义等。“Ākāra”(相)就是义等因本身。巴利
Atthānatthanti hitāhitaṃ. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ pana ‘‘atthattha’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 226) vuttaṃ, tattha attho eva atthatthoti atthassa aviparītatādassanatthaṃ dutiyena atthasaddena visesanaṃ. Na hi ñāṇaṃ anatthe ‘‘attho’’ti gaṇhātīti. Kāraṇākāraṇanti etthāpi evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthatthanti vā āmeḍitavacanaṃ sabbesaṃ atthānaṃ pākaṭakaraṇabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ, phalaṃ phalanti attho, hitapariyāyepi eseva nayo. Nti atthānatthādikaṃ. Ākāranti atthādikāraṇameva.
已通达之后再次观察,这是“观察”。具有邪思惟等特征的愚者状态,就是“愚痴”。正知,就是全面而多方面地了知。强烈的迷惑叫“迷乱”。从四面八方迷惑叫“遍迷乱”。因为它是导向恶趣之业的特殊助缘,所以叫“不可得”。“得”就是获得。对于无过失的诸法,它不像“明”那样成为特殊助缘,所以是“不可得”,也就是得不到。这是无明的差别;而依据“对苦无知”等说法,从作用、种类和特征三个方面所说的,则是无明的无差别。明等词的含义,应按照前面所说的方式去理解。巴利
Paṭividdhassa puna avekkhanā paccavekkhaṇā. Ducintitacintitādilakkhaṇassa bālassa bhāvo bālyaṃ. Sampajānātīti samaṃ pakārehi jānāti. Balavamoho pamoho. Samantato mohanaṃ sammoho. Duggatigāmikammassa visesapaccayattā avindiyaṃ. Vindatīti labhati. Anavajjadhammānaṃ vijjā viya visesapaccayo na hotīti vindiyaṃ na vindati. Ayaṃ avijjāya vemattatāti ayaṃ ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā kiccajātilakkhaṇehi vutto avijjāya aviseso. Vijjātiādīnaṃ vuttanayānasārena attho veditabbo.
没有石块、砂砾和沙子的地面是柔软的,所以依“柔软”之义这样说。巴利
Pāsāṇasakkharavālikāvirahitā bhūmi saṇhāti ‘‘saṇhaṭṭhenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“仅仅那么长的时期”就是指五百劫。已经超越、越过了被称为“色想”的色,因此叫“已超越色”,词义就是“定”。因为确实没有任何无色定是与色想一起生起的。灭尽定就更不用说了,在那里,非想非非想处定已经被单独列出,所以说“其余的无色定”。巴利
Tattakamevakālanti pañcakappasatāni. Vibhūtaṃ samattikkantaṃ rūpasaññāsaṅkhātaṃ rūpaṃ etāyāti vibhūtarūpaṃ, samāpattinti padattho. Na hi kāci arūpasamāpatti rūpasaññāsahagatā pavattīti. Nirodhasamāpattiyaṃ vattabbameva natthi, tattha nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā visuṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sesāruppasamāpattiyo’’ti.
不趋向调伏,就是恶劣、不驯服的马。更进一步的调伏,是为了圣道的调伏。巴利
Damathaṃ anupagacchanto duṭṭhasso khaluṅkasso. Uttaridamathāyāti ariyamaggadamathāya.
“其他”是指苦行道速通达者和乐行道速通达者。“由两侧的部分”是指色身和名身这两部分。“由两方面”是指依镇伏、断除和解脱的方式。巴利
Itaroti dukkhāpaṭipado khippābhiñño, sukhāpaṭipado ca khippābhiñño. Ubhayatobhāgehīti rūpakāyanāmakāyabhāgehi. Ubhayatoti vikkhambhanasamucchedavimuttivasena.
“也有多种”是指从自性上说也有多种。“由同一个词所表达”是指由共同名称的词所表达。巴利
Anekopīti sabhāvena anekopi. Ekasaddābhidheyyatāyāti sāmaññasaddābhidheyyatāya.
15. 资具理趣分别的注释巴利
15. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
49 为了说明“Hinoti”这个词的含义,因为诸词根有多种意义,所以他说“达到因的状态”。“Eti”是来、生起的意思。巴利
49.‘‘Hinotī’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatī’’ti āha anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Etīti āgacchati, uppajjatīti attho.
在“无明也是因”这一说法里,应当这样理解:无明对于紧接其后的无明,是通过无间缘、等无间缘、亲依止缘、无有缘、离去缘和修习缘而成为缘的;而对于同时生起的无明,则是通过俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘和因缘而成为缘的;对于不是同时生起的无明,则仅仅通过亲依止缘这一层关系而成为缘。因能产生自己的果,所以叫作因,因此说“因的状态是就果而言的”。巴利
Avijjāyapi hetubhāveti ettha avijjā anantarāya avijjāya anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi, anantarāya pana sahajātāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatahetupaccayehi, asahajātāya upanissayakoṭiyā eva paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ. Attano phalaṃ karotīti kāraṇanti āha ‘‘kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāyā’’ti.
由因缘所生的意义,就是果的意义,也就是被称为果的意义。巴利
Nibbattiattho phalattho phalasaṅkhāto attho.
所谓“自性”,是指在福德等诸行中,那种以造作为其自性的,就是因。“其余诸句”是指在识等句中。“如前所说的分类”是指“因有不共之相”等所说的分类。“任何一种缘”是指能生等任何一种原因。“由造作”是指直接和间接地生起。巴利
Yo sabhāvoti puññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ yo abhisaṅkharaṇasabhāvo, so hetu. Sesapadesūti viññāṇādipadesu. Yathāvuttappabhedoti ‘‘asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo hetū’’tiādinā vuttappabhedo. Yo kocipaccayoti janakādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇatoti paccakkhato, paramparāya ca nibbattanato.
16. 安立理趣分别的注释巴利
16. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
50 “由经所摄持”是指在经中已说的内容。执取立足处,是为了显示依止之境;执取同义词,是为了显示同义词的区分——应当这样连接理解。所谓“由于境依处之性”,是指由于那被称为境的生起处之性。“被亲近”就是被依止。“亲近”就是依止、服侍。“乞求”就是请求,意思是希求。五种欲乐通过作为所缘缘,成为欲渴爱的原因;执取相通过作为亲依止缘,成为执取随形好的原因。像这样,对其余各项也应当按适当的方式说明它们作为原因的性质。巴利
50.Suttena gahiteti sutte vutte. Padaṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānavisayadassanatthaṃ, vevacanaggahaṇaṃ adhivacanavibhāgadassanatthanti yojanā. Visayādhiṭṭhānabhāvatoti visayasaṅkhātapavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Vanīyatīti bhajīyati. Vanatīti bhajati sevati. Vanuteti yācati, patthetīti attho . Pañca kāmaguṇā kāmataṇhāya kāraṇaṃ hoti ārammaṇapaccayatāya. Nimittaggāho anubyañjanaggāhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti upanissayatāyāti evaṃ sesesupi yathārahaṃ kāraṇatā vattabbā.
51 关于“于身随观身而住”等句中应当说明的内容,应依照前述《特相理趣义分注释》里已经讲过的方式来理解。不过这里有一点不同:此即色法遍知,即以色为所依的识住遍知。巴利
51.‘‘Kāye kāyānupassī viharāhī’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 23) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – rūpadhammapariññāyāti rūpūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya.
见之为苦,这就是受随观,应当这样连接起来理解。对受之因的遍知,就是对触的遍知。通过“由受之力”这个词,说的是由自己所生起的苦之力。对受的遍知,就是对以受为所依的识住的遍知。这里的意旨是:由于它是常执的直接对立面,所以是无常随观。“常想之相”指的是以常想为因的。对想的遍知,就是对以想为所依的识住的遍知。因为应当被初道断除,所以说了“于见执著……中略……于非道行”。巴利
‘‘Dukkha’’nti passantī sā vedanānupassanāti yojetabbaṃ. Vedanāhetupariññāyāti phassapariññāya. ‘‘Vedanāvasenā’’ti padena attanā uppāditadukkhavasena. Vedanāpariññāyāti vedanūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya. Niccābhinivesapaṭipakkhato aniccānupassanāyāti adhippāyo. Niccasaññānimittassāti niccasaññāhetukassa. Saññāpariññāyāti saññūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya. Paṭhamamaggavajjhattā agatigamanassa vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhābhinivesassa…pe… agatigamanassa cā’’ti.
对行的遍知,就是对以行为所依的识住的遍知。巴利
Saṅkhārapariññāyāti saṅkhārūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya.
1. 教说理趣会合的注释巴利
1. Desanāhārasampātavaṇṇanā
“这样”这一段,是为了显示与摄义集开示之间的关联。其中,前两个譬喻说明巴利圣典就像打磨得极为精细的宝石地面,也像精心打造的阎浮金饰。而摄义分解的开示,则像在那里善加制作、恭敬供养的各种彩色花鬘,也像以种种光芒交织闪耀、串连各种宝珠而成的璎珞。最后一个譬喻则说明,它结合了殊胜而极值得尊重的大珠宝与缨络头发之后,显得更加困难。所谓“这首偈颂已说”,就是连接语。巴利
‘‘Eva’’ntiādi hārasampātadesanāya sambandhadassanaṃ. Tattha purimena upamādvayena suparikammakatamaṇikoṭṭimasadisī, suviracitajambunadābharaṇasadisī ca pāḷi. Tattha katanānāvaṇṇapupphūpahārasadisī, vividharaṃsijālāsamujjalabaddhanānāratanāvalisadisī ca hāravibhaṅgadesanāti dasseti. Pacchimena tassa paṇītamahārahe jaṭāhi saddhiṃ dukkaratarataṃ dīpeti. Yāyaṃ gāthā vuttāti yojanā.
52 因为按照前面所说的理由,这个“摄义分解分”并不适用,所以它的意思是:在那一分的开头并没有提到那首偈颂。但“摄义集分”则引用了它——正因为“摄义集分”依据前面所说的同一理由而引用了那首偈颂,所以才说“十六……中略……食”。“显示连接的方法”,就是指展示连接的方式。巴利
52. Yasmāyaṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti yathāvuttena kāraṇena, tasmā sā hāravibhaṅgavārassa ādimhi na paccāmaṭṭhāti adhippāyo . Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojetīti yasmā pana hārasampātavāro taṃ gāthaṃ payojeti yathāvutteneva kāraṇena, tasmā ‘‘soḷasa…pe… āhā’’ti āha. Yojanānayadassananti yojanāya nayadassanaṃ.
以此指的是“那死魔的足迹”这句话。“一切颠倒”指的是十二种颠倒。“通相……中略……被称为”的意思是:通相所立足的地方,那就是殊别。但从义理上说,正是想等以颠倒行相执取色等所缘,所以称为颠倒。为了说明这一点,就说了“想颠倒”等。巴利
Tenāti ‘‘taṃ maccuno pada’’nti vacanena. Sabbaṃ vipallāsanti dvādasavidhampi vipallāsaṃ. Sāmaññassa…pe… voharīyati yattha patiṭṭhitaṃ sāmaññaṃ, so viseso. Atthato pana saññādayo eva rūpādivisayaṃ viparītākārena gaṇhante vipallāsoti dassento ‘‘saññāvipallāso’’tiādimāha.
当五取蕴以因陀罗网等方式、以摩尼宝等形态显现时,由于它们是“我”和“我所”等观念产生的原因,按照词源学的说法就被称为“我”;又因为它们是那种认知和言说得以生起的所依相,所以叫“有身”;因为它们是乐等的依处,所以说为“有身依处”——因此说了“由他们”等话来开示。“他们”指的是诸取蕴。颠倒的活动方式是“于不净为净”等。它的范围是身、受、心、法。而无明……中略……正因为以迷乱为先导,所以是一切颠倒的根源。“且”字也应连接到“净乐想”这里。巴利
Indajālādivasena maṇiādiākārena upaṭṭhahante upādānakkhandhapañcake ahaṃmamādikāraṇatāya niruttinayena ‘‘attā’’ti vuccamāno taṃbuddhivohārappavattinimittatāya attabhāvo sukhādīnaṃ vatthutāya ‘‘attabhāvavatthū’’ti pavuccatīti āha ‘‘tehī’’tiādi. Tesanti upādānakkhandhānaṃ. Vipallāsānaṃ pavattiākāro ‘‘asubhe subha’’ntiādi. Visayo kāyavedanācittadhammā. Avijjā ca…pe… eva sammohapubbakattā sabbavipallāsānaṃ. Ca-saddo subhasukhasaññānanti etthāpi ānetvā yojetabbo.
这里的搭配方式是:“无明既是净乐想的缘,也同样是(常我想的缘),不只是渴爱;无明既是净乐想的缘,也同样是常我想的缘,不只是(净乐想的缘)。”即便如此,为了说明前两种颠倒想以渴爱为特别的缘,后两种以无明为特别的缘,所以接着说“即使这样”等话。这里应当知道,是以无明为代表来涵盖邪见。因此说“被见所覆的心”、“那是见颠倒”等。正如以无明为代表可以涵盖邪见,同样以见为代表也可以涵盖无明,所以说“以见为代表说了无明”。在渴爱和无明二者当中,净乐想以渴爱为特别的缘,却不是以无明为特别的缘;而常我想则以无明为特别的缘,不是以渴爱为特别的缘。为了说明这一点,所以说“迷为特别的缘”。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘avijjā ca subhasukhasaññānaṃ paccayo eva, na taṇhā eva, avijjā subhasukhasaññānañca paccayo, na niccaattasaññānaṃ evā’’ti. Evaṃ santepi purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ viparītasaññānaṃ taṇhā, pacchimānaṃ avijjā visesapaccayoti dassento āha ‘‘tathāpī’’tiādi. Avijjāsīsena cettha diṭṭhiyā gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhinivutaṃ citta’’nti , ‘‘yo diṭṭhivipallāso’’ti ca ādi, yathā ca avijjāsīsena diṭṭhiyā gahaṇaṃ, evaṃ diṭṭhisīsena avijjāyapi gahaṇaṃ siyāti āha ‘‘diṭṭhisīsena avijjā vuttā’’ti. Taṇhāvijjāsu subhasukhasaññānaṃ yathā taṇhā visesapaccayo, na evaṃ avijjā. Niccaattasaññānaṃ pana yathā avijjā visesapaccayo, na tathā taṇhāti dassento ‘‘moho visesapaccayo’’ti āha.
后两种……乃至……成为,是因为在过去的部分,渴爱的固执有强与不强的差别。正因如此,经中只说“他把过去色执为我”,而不说“欢喜”。“渴爱颠倒”是指依止渴爱而现起的颠倒,因为渴爱本身并不是颠倒。因此说“以渴爱为根的颠倒”。“依见欢喜”是指以渴爱为亲依止缘的见欢喜,由于这个缘故,它被称为“渴爱颠倒”。“以此”是指“那渴爱颠倒”等文句的含义。十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非想非非想论以及五种认为最上现法涅槃论,他们按照自己所达到的状态,通过设想证得涅槃的方式,执取净与乐的相;七种断灭论则不是这样,所以说“大多数”。也可以从对立面的角度来说,也就是从清净的角度来说。只要还有随烦恼,心就不清净;当那些随烦恼被断除时,心才清净。因此说“不……”等。放下“以不防护的心”这段经文,因为开示是透过颠倒这一门而被导出的,所以说“依随顺的连接来完成偈颂”。巴利
Pacchimānaṃ dvinnaṃ…pe… hotīti atītaṃse taṇhābhinivesassa balavabhāvābhāvato. Teneva hi ‘‘so atītaṃ rūpaṃ attato samanupassati’’cceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘abhinandatī’’ti. Taṇhāvipallāsoti taṇhaṃ upanissāya pavatto vipallāso, na hi taṇhā sayaṃ vipallāso. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāmūlako vipallāso’’ti. Diṭṭhābhinandanavasenāti taṇhupanissayadiṭṭhābhinandanavasena, yato so ‘‘taṇhāvipallāso’’ti vutto. Etenāti ‘‘yo taṇhāvipallāso’’tiādipāṭhena. Soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā ca, yathā attano gatāya, nibbānappattiyā ca parikappavasena subhasukhākāraggāhino, na evaṃ satta ucchedavādāti āha ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti. Paṭipakkhavasenapīti visuddhivasenapi. Yāva hi upakkilesā, tāva cittaṃ na visujjhateva. Yadā ca te pahīnā, tadā visuddhameva. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’’ti pāḷiṃ nikkhipitvā vipallāsamukheneva desanāya niddhāriyamānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yathānusandhināva gāthaṃ niṭṭhapetu’’nti.
“魔罗的”是指烦恼魔罗。因为一个人处在烦恼魔罗的控制之下,就等于落入了其余魔罗的手中。所以经文说“仅以取烦恼魔罗来说”等等。巴利
Mārassāti kilesamārassa. Tassa hi vase ṭhito sesamārānaṃ hatthagato evāti. Tenāha ‘‘kilesamāraggahaṇenevā’’tiādi.
魔罗的束缚:从众生魔罗这一方面来说,魔罗的束缚就叫魔罗的束缚。因为他把本质上属于烦恼束缚、连同自己魔罗眷属在内的一切,执取为“我”。因此说“内在……中略……你将解脱”。从另一种魔罗的方面来说,魔罗本身就是束缚,所以叫魔罗的束缚。脱离造作就是涅槃。巴利
Mārabandhananti sattamārapakkhe mārassa bandhananti mārabandhanaṃ. So hi kilesabandhanabhūte attano samārakaparise maññati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘antali…pe… mokkhasī’’ti (mahāva. 33). Itaramārapakkhe mārova bandhananti mārabandhanaṃ. Visaṅkhāro nibbānaṃ.
心因为和痴相应,所以被称为“愚痴”。即使是在有贪、有嗔的时候,痴也仍然存在,但这里把“愚痴”单独提出来说,是为了显示它作为特有的痴。为了说明这一点,所以他说“依两种愚痴心的生起来说”。所谓“如此”,就是说:由于贪等不善法的生起而截断了善的资粮,心就成了不防护的状态;一切错误的执著也都归摄到这里、汇集到这里,所以说“邪见……中间省略……应当了知”。所谓“一切”,就是指“不防护”“被邪见所毁”“被昏沉睡眠所制伏”这三句里所说的那些法。巴利
Mohasampayogato cittaṃ ‘‘mūḷha’’nti vuttanti rattaduṭṭhānampi mūḷhatāya sabbhāve ‘‘mūḷha’’nti visuṃ vacanaṃ āveṇikamohavasena vuttanti dassento ‘‘dvinnaṃ momūhacittuppādānaṃ vasenā’’ti āha. Evanti evaṃ rāgādiakusalappattiyā kusalabhaṇḍacchedanato arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, sabbopi micchābhiniveso ettheva saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhi…pe… veditabba’’nti. Sabbepīti ‘‘arakkhitaṃ, micchādiṭṭhihataṃ, thinamiddhābhibhūta’’nti tīhipi padehi vuttadhammā.
“眼”是指通过眼门。“色”是指依托于不同种类的所依的色处。“执取相”是指执取被构想出来的相,比如“女人”“男人”“好看的”“不好看的”,或者指有执取这种相的习惯。“执取随形好”是指执取手、脚、笑、说话等种种细节,烦恼就是随着这些细节一个接一个地生起,所以这些细节被称为随形好;也就是执取这类随形好的相,或者指有执取这种相的习惯。“由于什么原因”是指那个相,意思就是执取相和随形好的原因。这样一来,当说到“眼根不防护而住”时,那个被称为“执取相、执取随形好”的人,他的眼根、眼门就是不防护的,也就是没有用正念的门闩把眼门关上,而让它随意活动。对于那个色,如果执取可爱的相状,就会生起贪欲;如果执取不可爱的相状,就会生起忧恼;如果不作观察,就会生起愚痴;如果有错误的执著,就会生起邪见。就这样,贪欲、嗔害,以及其他因为低劣而称为恶、因为从不善巧所生而称为不善的法,就会不断地渗入、不断地生起。巴利
Cakkhunāti dvārena. Rūpanti visabhāgavatthusannissitaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ. Nimittaggāhīti ‘‘itthī’’ti vā puriso’’ti vā ‘‘subha’’nti vā ‘‘asubha’’nti vā parikappitanimittaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa vā gahaṇasīlo. Anubyañjanaggāhīti hatthapādahasitakathitādippabhede kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato anubyañjanasaññite ākāre gaṇhāti, tesaṃ vā gahaṇasīlo. Yatvādhikaraṇanti yaṃ nimittaṃ, nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇanimittanti attho. Evaṃ ‘‘cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharanta’’nti, yo ‘‘nimittaggāhī, anubyañjanaggāhī’’ti ca vutto puggalo, tamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ cakkhudvāraṃ asaṃvutaṃ satikavāṭena apihitaṃ katvā vattantaṃ, tassa ca rūpassa iṭṭhākāraggahaṇe abhijjhā, aniṭṭhākāraggahaṇe domanassaṃ, asamapekkhane moho micchābhinivese micchādiṭṭhīti evaṃ abhijjhābyāpādā, aññe ca lāmakaṭṭhena pāpakā akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ anu anu pavatteyyuṃ.
他不为那件事去实践守护,意思是:他不去实践用正念的门闩把眼门关好。接着,为了说明这种不实践就是眼根没有保护、没有守护而不生起,他说了“不守护……略……进入”。因为即使不守护是在速行中生起的,由于它是通过那道门在活动,所以也就被称为“眼根不守护”。其余门也应按照所说的方式理解其含义。对于“依前际施设等”这样简要说的内容,为了详细展示,先区分“简要与详细不同”,然后归纳这些内容,于是说了“这些……”等语句。巴利
Tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjatīti tassa cakkhudvārassa saṃvarāya satikavāṭena pidahanatthaṃ na paṭipajjati. Sā pana appaṭipatti cakkhundriyassa anārakkhāsaṃvarassa anuppādoti dassento ‘‘na rakkhati…pe… āpajjatī’’ti āha. Javane uppajjamānopi hi asaṃvaro tena dvārena pavattanato ‘‘cakkhundriyāsaṃvaro’’tveva vuccatīti. Sesadvāresupi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. ‘‘Pubbantakappanavasena cā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘saṅkhepato ca vitthāro añño’’ti katvā taṃ samuccinanto ‘‘yā ca kho imā’’tiādimāha.
所谓“如所说的不善法”,指的是十二种不善心生起之法,或者指这些法的所依处。因为它们就是除去“集”的五取蕴。“如是”这个词,是按照《导论》巴利原文及其注疏所确定的方式来用的。“这里”则是指在“以无护之心……”这首偈颂中。巴利
Yathāvuttā akusalā dhammāti dvādasa akusalacittuppādadhammā, tesaṃ vatthūni vā. Te hi samudayavajjā pañcupādānakkhandhā. ‘‘Eva’’nti iminā nettipāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyañca niddhāritappakārena. Idhāti imissaṃ ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti gāthāyaṃ.
虽然在《教说理趣》的巴利文中,并没有照原样收录“因此,有护心者……”这首偈颂,但从义理上说,它已经通过“世尊为了遍知他们……”等文句被包含进去了。为了说明这首偈颂确实已被引用,先问“如何开示?”,然后引出“因此,有护心者……”这首偈颂。巴利
Yadipi desanāhārasampātapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthā sarūpato na gahitā, atthato pana ‘‘tesaṃ bhagavā pariññāyā’’tiādinā gahitā evāti tassā gahitabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ desetī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthaṃ uddhari.
以如理作意而造业:意思是说,像“他如理作意‘这是苦’”等这样的方式,以被称为观的如理作意来从事修习之业,也就是正在修习。如实智:是依知遍知的前分观,以“由无明集起故色集起,由无明灭故色灭”等五十种行相来了知。为了说明地狱趣是苦苦之苦,善趣中的殊胜处和梵天界的某一部分是行苦之苦,其余地方则兼具两种或三种苦,所以说“随其所应,与三种苦性相应”。巴利
Yonisomanasikārena kammaṃ karontoti ‘‘so ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādinā nayena vipassanāsaṅkhātena yonisomanasikārena bhāvanākammaṃ karonto, bhāventoti attho . Yathābhūtañāṇanti ñātapariññāya pubbabhāgavipassanāya ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo, avijjānirodhā rūpanirodho’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.50) samapaññāsāya ākārehi. Nirayagatiyaṃ dukkhadukkhatā, sugativisese brahmalokekadese saṅkhāradukkhatā, itarattha dve tissopīti dassento āha ‘‘yathāsambhavaṃ tividhadukkhatāyogenā’’ti.
2. 抉择理趣会合的注释巴利
2. Vicayahārasampātavaṇṇanā
53 “以善法为所缘”这句话,是仅就为了善法而生起(渴爱)这一点来说的,并不是说善法在这里成了所缘缘,因为此处“善法”指的是出世间法。事实上,非顺取的法任何时候都不可能成为执取的所缘。由于对果法生起的渴爱被执取,所以才说“善……应当见”。这是在《教说理趣》的涵摄组合中说的。那么,问难者凭什么说它怎么可能是善的呢?他只是抓住“善”这个字眼就来质问罢了。这应当看作只是一个举例而已。而且它也是断除的因,这一点问难者想必也会认同。接着以“慢也有两种”等文句说明:慢和那种渴爱之所以应当被修习,是因为它们是断除不善法、生起善法的助缘。巴利
53.Kusaladhammārammaṇāti kusaladhamme uddissa pavattimattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tesaṃ ārammaṇapaccayataṃ idha ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti lokuttaradhammānaṃ adhippetattā. Na hi kadāci anupādāniyā dhammā upādānārammaṇā honti. Phaladhamme uddissa pavattāya taṇhāya gahitattā ‘‘kusala…pe… daṭṭhabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Desanāhāreti desanāhārasampāte. Kathaṃ pana kusalabhāvoti ‘‘kusalā’’ti vacanamattaṃ gahetvā codeti, tañca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, pahānahetubhāvopissā siyā codakena sampaṭicchitova. ‘‘Mānopi duvidho’’tiādinā mānassa ca tassā taṇhāya ca sevitabbabhāvo akusalānaṃ pahānāya, kusalānaṃ uppattiyā ca paccayabhāvato.
依于出离的忧,是指因为懊悔“我没能证得圣者的境界”而生起的忧。这是它和前后文的关联。如是,就是按照巴利经文所说的方式这样连接起来:先让希求现前,当悦意的所缘在六门中出现时,从无常等角度建立起观。这里说“悦意的所缘”,是为了表明前面所说的懊悔之忧之所以生起,是因为所执取的对象实际上并不可意。为了解释“如何依出离”这句话的意思,才说了“依观之力”等。或者说,除了观之外,以初禅等方式所说的善法,在这里就是出离。由于提到了随念,就已经包含了近行定,所以才说“以初禅等之力”。其中的“等”字,收摄了从第二禅开始直到最胜果的一切更殊胜的法。也就是那慧解脱。巴利
Nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ nāma ‘‘ariyabhūmiṃ pāpuṇituṃ nāsakkhi’’nti anusocato uppannaṃ domanassanti sambandho. Evanti iminā pāḷiyaṃ vuttappakārena, pihaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate aniccādivasena vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvāti yojanā. Iṭṭhārammaṇañcettha yathāvuttaanusocanadomanassuppattīnaṃ yathābhiniviṭṭhassa ārammaṇassa aniṭṭhatāyāti dassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ nekkhammavasenā’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘vipassanāvasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vipassanādivinimuttā vā paṭhamajjhānādivasena vuttā kusalā dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ. Anussatiggahaṇena upacārajjhānameva gahitanti ‘‘paṭhamajjhānādivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena dutiyajjhānato paṭṭhāya yāva aggaphalā uparivisesā saṅgahitā. Yāya paññāvimuttiyā.
以舍与念清净的状态,也就是具有由舍所生的念清净的本质。业相应,是指适合、契合于观修等修行工作。不信,是指以不信为因,也有人读作由不信,意思是一样的。入于光明,是指进入智慧的光明。虽然前面已经说过慧,但为了表明不只是不信等,其他烦恼的摧破也是靠慧才得以成就,而且这慧就是这样的状态,所以接着说:入于光明者,在烦恼的黑暗中不动摇。巴利
Upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvenāti upekkhājanitasatipārisuddhisabbhāvena. Kammayogganti vipassanābhāvanādikammassa yoggaṃ anurūpaṃ anucchavikaṃ. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyahetu, ‘‘assaddhiyenā’’tipi paṭhanti, so evattho. Obhāsagatanti ñāṇobhāsagataṃ. Kāmaṃ pubbepi paññā vuttā, assaddhiyādīhi pana aññesaṃ kilesānaṃ vidhamanampi paññāya eva hoti, sā ca evaṃbhūtāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘obhāsagataṃ kilesandhakāre na iñjatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
愤怒就是嗔。不悦意的忧就是忧受。神变智等六种神通是众所周知的,为了说明“两种殊胜”所说的法,才说“意所成神变和观智”。垢染是贪等烦恼。随烦恼是贪欲、不正的贪等。随顺就是与它们同处一境。悸动是微弱的散乱生起。强猛的是不能安住。一切邪执都来自不如理作意和邪思维。其中,不如理作意是不善心的生起,属于它范围内的邪思维则伴随着散乱,所以说“是邪执之因,属于见的一面”,也因此说“思维也是见的立足处,不如理作意也是见的立足处”。巴利
Kopo kodho. Appaccayo domanassaṃ. Iddhividhañāṇādikā cha abhiññā pākaṭā evāti ‘‘dve ca visese’’ti vuttadhamme dassetuṃ ‘‘manomayiddhi, vipassanāñāṇañcā’’ti āha. Aṅgaṇāni rāgādayo. Upakkilesā abhijjhāvisamalobhādayo. Anulomanaṃ tadekaṭṭhatā. Phandanā dubbalā vikkhepappavatti. Balavatī anavaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbo micchābhiniveso ayonisomanasikārena hoti, micchāvitakkena ca. Tattha ayonisomanasikāro akusalacittuppādo tappariyāpanno micchāvitakko vikkhepasahito evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘micchābhinivesahetutāya diṭṭhipakkho’’ti vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, ayoniso manasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124).
或者也可以这样理解:动摇就是心的颤动,是依于见的恐惧。正如经中所说:那些不知不见的沙门和婆罗门,他们的感受已落入渴爱,就只是在那里恐惧和颤动罢了。不安住就是无法安住,是依于见的思维。正因为这样,凡夫时而执取常见,时而执取断见,不断跳入种种邪见的执取之中,就像迷失的盲人,就像被丢进大海的船,就像被套在机械上的牛,就这样到处乱转。因此才说,见也是见的立足处,思维也是见的立足处。而在这一层解释里,由于它是邪执,又由于它是邪执的因,所以它有两个面向,应当理解为这是用一部分来暗示其余的省略说法。巴利
Atha vā iñjanāti phandanā, diṭṭhaparittāso. Yathāha ‘‘tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ajānataṃ apassataṃ vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphanditamevā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.105 ādayo). Aṭṭhitīti anavaṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhivitakko. Tena hi puthujjano kāle sassataṃ, kāle ucchedanti taṃ taṃ diṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ pakkhandanto sattato paribbhaṭṭhaandho viya, samudde vissaṭṭhavāhanikā viya, yante yuttagoṇo viya ca tathā tathā paribbhamati. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhiyopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124) ca. Etasmiñca pakkhe micchābhinivesatāya, micchābhinivesahetutāya ca tassā dve pakkhāti ekadesasarūpekaseso katoti veditabbaṃ.
“如是”这些词,是用来显示它与“那个上方的”等经文之间的关联。为了说明“嗔恚想”这个词是处格意义的转成词,注释里才说“在嗔恚想等之中”。“色界想”:这是以“想”为标题,来指称色界的禅那。“种种想”:指种种自性的想,或者指以种种自性为所缘而生起的想。除了嗔恚想之外,其余欲界的想就是这些。“他超越了那些”:意思是他连同那些色想、种种想以及它们的所缘,都彻底超越了。巴利
‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā ‘‘so uparima’’ntiādipāḷiyaṃ sambandhaṃ dasseti. Paṭighasaññāti bhummatthe paccattavacananti dassento ‘‘paṭigha…pe… saññāsū’’ti āha. Rūpāvacarasaññāti saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānāni vadati. Nānattasaññāti nānāsabhāvā, nānāsabhāve vā ārammaṇe saññā. Ṭhapetvā paṭighasaññā avasiṭṭhakāmāvacarasaññā hetā. Tā samatikkamatīti tā rūpasaññānānattasaññāyo ārammaṇehi saddhiṃ sammadeva atikkamati.
色界禅那的光明也以遍为所缘。因为无色界禅那的生起,正是遍的流衍。“见”是指看见遍色。与断除贪欲和嗔恚一起发起的精进、作为助力的止,以及念和轻安,前面已经说过是修观的资具。既然不存在没有念的思择,所以说“那现前而不忘失的念,这就是观”,以此显示以念为首统摄了观。接着说明断除迷乱,这就是上下文的关联。巴利
Rūpāvacarajjhānobhāsopi kasiṇārammaṇā. Kasiṇanissando hi āruppajjhānuppatti. Dassananti kasiṇarūpānaṃ dassanaṃ. Abhijjhābyāpādappahānena saddhiṃ vīriyārambho upakārako samatho satipassaddhiyo parikkhāraṅgatā vuttā eva. Satirahitaṃ sammasanaṃ nāma natthīti ‘‘yā upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena satisīsena vipassanā gahitāti dasseti. Sammosānaṃ pahānamāhāti sambandho.
54 54. 对于现在乐、未来乐果、唯作、无漏、非下劣人所修习这些方面,经中其余地方已经宣说了这个定的寂静、殊胜等差别,那些内容在这里也都收摄进来了。为了说明这些词句的含义,注释说“由于支的寂静性”等。其中,“由于支的寂静性”是指果定禅那诸支已经寂静。“由于烦恼尘垢的寂静性”是指烦恼尘垢已经止息。“殊胜”就是广大、崇高。“以心一境性”是指以称为道定的心一境性。“心一境性”就是心安住于一处。对于世间定,必须镇伏与它相反的障碍,也就是五盖、对初禅的贪爱等,还要遮止其他烦恼。但对于这阿拉汉果的定,因为烦恼已经止息,所以没有什么需要镇伏,也没有什么需要遮止。它是在道心之后、在等至的那一刹那,不需刻意加功用行就证得的;又因为它是安住不退失而证得的,所以它不属于“需要以加行来镇伏和遮止”的那一类。巴利
54. Paccuppannasukhaāyatisukhavipākakiriyanirāmisaakāpurisasevitabhāvehi eva sesā pāḷiyaṃ etassa samādhissa santapaṇītatādivisesā vuttā, tepi idha saṅgahitāti tesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ dassento ‘‘aṅgasantatāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha aṅgasantatāyāti phalajhānaṅgānaṃ upasantatāya. Kilesadarathasantatāyāti kilesadarathapaṭippassaddhiyā. Paṇītoti uḷāro. Ekodibhāvenāti maggasamādhisaṅkhātena ekodibhāvena. Ekodibhāvanti samādhānaṃ. Lokiyasamādhissa paccanīkanīvaraṇapaṭhamajjhānanikantiādīni niggahetabbāni, aññe ca kilesā vāretabbā. Imassa pana arahattasamādhissa paṭippassaddhakilesattā na niggahetabbaṃ, vāretabbañca atthīti so maggānantaraṃ samāpattikkhaṇeva appayogeneva adhigatattā, ṭhitattā ca aparihānivasena vā adhigatattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato.
“达到念的圆满”这一说法,是在说明:即使念没有持续现起,但因为念极为丰足,仍然可以称为具念者。“按照所限定的时间来说”这一说法,是在说明:因为念是有所限定的,所以称为具念者。巴利
‘‘Sativepullappatto’’ti etena appavattamānāyapi satiyā satibahulatāya sato eva nāmāti dasseti. ‘‘Yathāparicchinnakālavasenā’’ti etena paricchinnasatiyā satoti dasseti.
“将要说的”,是指紧接着后面要讲的“喜遍满”等内容。不过,巴利原文中出现的是“喜遍满性”这个词。这是就“五支正定”来说的,因为慧是作为定的一支被列举出来的,所以才这样说。也正因如此,注疏里才对“喜遍满性”等词的含义作了解释。其中,应当依照“他以远离所生的喜与乐,浸润、充满此身”这样的方式,来理解喜的遍满和乐的遍满。其余部分就很容易明白了。巴利
Vakkhamānenāti ‘‘pītipharaṇā’’tiādinā anantaraṃ vakkhamānena. ‘‘Pītipharaṇatā’’ti pana pāḷi āgatā. Taṃ ‘‘pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355) samādhiaṅgabhāvena paññā uddiṭṭhāti katvā vuttaṃ. Tato eva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘pītipharaṇatā’’tiādīnañca atthasaṃvaṇṇanā katā. Tattha ‘‘so imameva kāyaṃ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandetī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.226) nayena pītiyā, sukhassa ca pharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
从定的角度说“止被举出”,意思是:止是就它自身的本性而被举出的,不是从助益法的角度被举出的。这就是这段话的意趣所在。巴利
Samādhivasena samatho uddhaṭoti sabhāvavasena samatho uddhaṭo, na upakārakadhammavasenāti adhippāyo.
55 因为定与贪对立,所以说“正在修学增上心学”。所谓“依照前面所说的方式”,就是指“通过消除乐愿等而成为无愿”等等。这里应当知道:对于如实照见诸行刹那坏灭的人,贪无法站住脚,所以无常随观被说为适合贪行者;同样,对于如实照见诸行本性是苦的人,在本性已是苦的事物上再生起苦,就像往伤口上浇碱水一样,嗔无法站住脚,所以苦随观被说为适合嗔行者;同样,当诸行被如实拆解、破除密集,以无我的空性显现时,痴无法站住脚,所以无我随观被说为适合痴行者。因为定与贪对立,所以说“正在修学增上心学”。这个道理也适用于其余两者。这里剩下的内容很容易理解。巴利
55. Rāgapaṭipakkhattā samādhissa ‘‘adhicittasikkhāya sikkhanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttanayānusārenāti ‘‘sukhapaṇidhiādisamugghāṭanena appaṇihito’’tiādinā. Ettha ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgurataṃ sammadeva passantassa na rāgo patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti aniccānupassanā rāgacaritassa sappāyā vuttā, tathā saṅkhārānaṃ sabhāvadukkhataṃ sammadeva passantassa pakatiyāpi dukkhitesu dukkhuppādanaṃ vaṇe khārodakasekasadisanti na doso patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti dukkhānupassanā dosacaritassa sappāyā vuttā, tathā saṅkhāresu sammadeva ghanavinibbhoge kate attasuññatāya upaṭṭhahamānāya na moho patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti anattānupassanā mohacaritassa sappāyā vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Rāgapaṭipakkhattā samādhissa ‘‘adhicittasikkhāya sikkhanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo itaresu. Sesamettha suviññeyyaṃ.
忍耐力强的人,能克服已经生起的不悦和不喜而安住,因此轻松地证得定。所以说,以忍耐为首要这一点,也被说为倾向于止这一分的人能够成就的原因。“精进得以成就”说的是身体方面的精进达到圆满。经中所说的正业和正精进有身行等不同分类,应当理解为:这是就它们以身体行动为生起基础来说的。巴利
Khantibahulo uppannaṃ aratiṃ anabhiratiṃ abhibhuyya viharanto sukhena samādhiṃ adhigacchatīti khantippadhānatāpi samathapakkhabhajanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttā. Uṭṭhānaṃ sampajjatīti sampannakāyikavīriyaṃ. Sammākammantavāyāmānaṃ yo kāyikādivikappo vutto pāḷiyaṃ, so nesaṃ kāyikassa payogassa samuṭṭhānavasena veditabbo.
“快速证得”这句话,是在说明圣道修行的状态。“通过观而证得解脱”这句话,是在说明依靠观的力量所证的断除解脱,就像依靠止的力量所证的镇伏解脱一样。Lokiyehi这个表述是从格。Mahantāna的意思是广大、殊胜,也就是胜妙的意思。巴利
‘‘Khippādhigamo’’ti iminā maggāsevanabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vipassanāya vimuttādhigamo’’ti iminā vipassanānubhāvena samucchedavimutti vikkhambhanavimutti viya samathānubhāvenāti dasseti. Lokiyehīti nissakkavacanaṃ. Mahantānanti uḷārānaṃ, paṇītānanti attho.
56 所谓“抉择理趣”,是指对贪等那些作为欺诳之因的恶法进行简择。“净化”,是指以这样的方式净化:让对皈依等对象所生的无知等杂染不再生起。“圆满”,是指以这样的方式圆满:让戒以无破损等状态而具足圆满,没有欠缺。巴利
56.Tanti vicayahāraṃ. Visaṃvādanahetūnaṃ lobhādīnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. Sodhentoti yathā saraṇādivisayā aññāṇādisaṃkilesā na pavattanti, evaṃ sodhento. Paripūrentāti yathā sīlaṃ akhaṇḍādibhāvena paripuṇṇaṃ hoti anūnaṃ, evaṃ paripūrentā.
“Tathāpaṭipajjanto”这句话,表明导师的大报答已经圆满;所以在第一段论述中,才说“见地以及修地”。巴利
‘‘Tathāpaṭipajjanto’’ti iminā satthu mahāpatikārabhāvo paripuṇṇo dassitoti paṭhamavāde ‘‘dassanābhūmiñca bhāvanābhūmiñcā’’ti vuttaṃ.
为了这个目的,就是为了断除这个、那个。如此行道的人,是指像这样以不净禅那等作为基础,从而证得不来道等的人。巴利
Yassa atthāyāti yassa yassa pahānatthāya. Tathā paṭipannassāti yathā asubhajjhānādiṃ pādakaṃ katvā anāgāmimaggādiadhigamo hoti, tathā paṭipannassa.
被杀,就是被杀害。巴利
Vadhitanti ghātitaṃ.
“作为人出生”这句话,要联系前后文来理解:应当和“父亲是作为人出生的漏尽者”连接,同样也要和“母亲是作为人出生的”连接。按照分类的宣告和宣说,或者用符合分类的话语来告知。巴利
‘‘Manussabhūto’’ti idaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ katvā ‘‘pitā manussabhūto khīṇāsavo’’ti ca tathā ‘‘mātā manussabhūtā’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Bhedānurūpassa sāvanaṃ anussāvanaṃ, bhedānurūpena vā vacanena viññāpanaṃ.
57 “人身”指生为人类。“性根成就”指具备男性身份。“因”指连同意愿与语愿得以成就的过去因缘具足。“见师”指导师亲自现前。“功德成就”指获得神通与等至。“责任”指不顾惜自身身体而为导师做事。“欲”指为成佛而生起的坚定愿求,具有不退转的性质。巴利
57.Manussattanti manussajātitā. Liṅgasampattīti purisabhāvo. Hetūti manovacīpaṇidhānasiddhiyā saddhiṃ pubbahetusampadā. Satthāradassananti satthu sammukhībhāvo. Guṇasampattīti abhiññāsamāpattilābho. Adhikāroti attano sarīranirapekkhaṃ satthu upakārakaraṇaṃ. Chandatāti buddhabhāvāya daḷhacchandatā anivattidhammatā.
“不生起”这一说法是有依据的,比如“我没有老师,没有与我相等的人”这类话。世尊是立足于这个世界而说的。有人问舍利弗尊者:“如今还有别的沙门或婆罗门,能在正觉上与世尊相等吗?”舍利弗被这样问时,回答说:“尊者,没有。”为了说明其中的理由,法将舍利弗正是通过这部经——“这是不可能的,没有这个道理,在同一个世界里会出现两位阿拉汉、正自觉者”——来表达:排除这个作为佛田的世界,在其他地方说不生起。这就是他的用意。巴利
Na uppajjantīti pana atthīti ‘‘na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; kathā. 405; mahāva. 11; mi. pa. 4.5.11) imissā lokadhātuyā ṭhatvā vadantena bhagavatā ‘‘kiṃ panāvuso sāriputta, atthetarahi añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavato samasamo sambodhiyanti evaṃ puṭṭho ahaṃ, bhante, ‘no’ti vadeyya’’nti (dī. ni. 3.161) vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.161; a. ni. 1.277) imaṃ suttaṃ dassentena dhammasenāpatināva buddhakhettabhūtaṃ imaṃ lokadhātuṃ ṭhapetvā aññattha anuppatti vuttā hotīti adhippāyo.
已经划定了田界,也就是说,已经这样认定:这叫做佛田。巴利
Khettapariggaho kato nāma hoti ‘‘idaṃ buddhakhettaṃ nāmā’’ti.
像这样,已经达到了是处与非处的状态:按照前面所说的方式,成为了是处;或者按照所说的道理,其他法也各自相应地以是处与非处的方式生起。成为众生施设的基础:这是针对与根紧密相连的诸蕴而说的。巴利
Evaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvaṃ gatāti vuttappakārena ṭhānabhūtā, vuttanayena vā aññepi yathārahaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvena pavattā. Sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtāti indriyabaddhe khandhe sandhāya vadati.
58 果的现证性,就是对“此业感得此果”这样各自业果的了知。无不予果,是指在因缘和合时,业必定产生果报。因此他说“已造作、已积聚的”。巴利
58.Phalassapaccakkhakāritāti ‘‘imassa kammassa idaṃ phala’’nti taṃtaṃkammaphalāvabodho. Appadānābhāvoti paccayasamavāye kammassa ekantato phaluppādanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘katūpacitāna’’nti.
59 以渴爱的执著而耽著的事物,就是“执取的事物”。以色有、无色有等来说,就像有渴爱那样,它自己就显示出来了。巴利
59.Ajjhositavatthunāti taṇhābhinivesavasena abhiniviṭṭhavatthunā. Rūpabhavaarūpabhavādināti bhavataṇhā viya sayaṃ dasseti.
按三蕴来说,就是戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴这三蕴。按道的分类来说,就是按“能往一切处”等不同的道来区分。巴利
Khandhattayavasenāti sīlādikkhandhattayavasena. Paṭipadāvibhāgenāti ‘‘sabbatthagāminī’’ti ādipaṭipadāya bhedena.
能往各处者:指在地狱到涅槃这两类应往处中,习惯随处而去的。能往一切处者:指在如上所说的一切处所中,习惯随处而去的。巴利
Tatthatatthagāminīti nirayādinibbānanti dvīsu gandhabbaṭṭhānesu tattha tattheva gamanasīlā. Sabbatthagāminīti yathāvuttesu sabbaṭṭhānesu ca gamanasīlā.
等活、黑绳、众合、号叫、大号叫、炎热、大炎热、无间,这八个是大地狱。每一个大地狱各有四个门,每一个门各有粪塘地狱等四种,这样就描述了十六个近边地狱。巴利
Sañjīvo kāḷasuttaṃ saṅghāto roruvo mahāroruvo tāpano mahātāpano avīcīti ete aṭṭha mahānirayā. Ekekassa cattāri cattāri dvārāni, ekekasmiṃ dvāre cattāro cattāro gūthanirayādayoti evaṃ soḷasa ussadaniraye vaṇṇenti.
帝释天神、夜摩等是上首天王。像生主、婆楼那、伊舍那这些,则是第二等及以下的随从侍者。巴利
Sakkasuyāmādiko jeṭṭhakadevarājā. Pajāpativaruṇaīsānādayo viya dutiyādiṭṭhānantarakārako paricārako.
在“烦恼欲”这一项里,这是按照《大义释》中“意图是欲,贪是欲,意图贪是欲”所说的“意图”来讲的。因为这种意图也会逼迫、灼烧,它生起本身就是烦恼性的,所以叫烦恼欲,并不是因为它是烦恼的所依处。“与欲相应”是指与称为欲贪的那种欲相应,或者说是被欲系缚。还应当知道,虽然其他与欲相应的心法也存在,但“欲”这个词专门用在“寻”上,是作为界的名称而约定俗成的,这是因为寻在生起欲寻时力量特别强。在嗔恨界等当中,道理也是一样。“害”就是令他人或自己受苦。不过这里说的是不正当的害,也就是邪害。巴利
Kilesakāmapakkheti ‘‘saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmoti (mahāni. 1) ettha vuttasaṅkappavasena vuttaṃ. Sopi hi vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti kilesattasambhavato kilesakāmo vutto, na kilesavatthubhāvato. Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena sampayutto, kāmapaṭibaddho vā. Aññesu ca kāmapaṭisaṃyuttesu dhammesu vijjamānesu vitakke eva kāmasaddo dhātusaddo niruḷhoti veditabbo vitakkassa kāmasaṅkappavuttiyā sātisayattā. Esa nayo byāpādadhātuādīsu. Parassa, attano ca dukkhāpanaṃ vihiṃsā. Taṃ tu micchāhi vihiṃsā.
应当根据种子等界的差别,了知蕴等的差别。所谓“蕴”,就是两种类别的聚合体。巴利
Bījādidhātunānattavasena khandhādinānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Khandhoti dvidhābhūtaggo.
60 “意乐界”指的是意乐的自性。就像粪便等有它的自性,只会跟粪便等类的东西混在一起;同样,人们的意乐也有这样的自性:破戒之类的人只会跟破戒之类的人混在一起。巴利
60.Ajjhāsayadhātūti ajjhāsayasabhāvo. Yathā gūthādīnaṃ sabhāvo eso yaṃ gūthādīheva saṃsandati, evaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayassevesa sabhāvo, yaṃ dussīlādayo dussīlādikeheva saṃsandanti.
因为善行以信为根本,所以经中说“凡依于信”等语。正如经中所说:“信是种子。”(《经集》77)应当这样搭配理解:凡依于贪,也依于信;凡依于嗔,也依于信;凡依于痴,也依于信。“依于精进”,就是依于正精进。“依于慧”,就是依于道正见。巴利
Saddhāmūlakattā kusalakiriyāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ saddhāvasenā’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘saddhā bīja’’nti (su. ni. 77). Yaṃ lobhavasena, saddhāvasena ca dosavasena, saddhāvasena ca mohavasena , saddhāvasena cāti yojetabbaṃ. Vīriyavasenāti sammappadhānavīriyavasena. Paññāvasenāti maggasammādiṭṭhivasena.
不善业已被造作、已获得机会,这在圣典中也有明文,所以才说“被异熟障所覆”。不过应当知道,这只是举例,因为“被业障等所覆”也同样包含在内。就像所举的提婆达多、果咖离咖、苏那卡达、离车族之子那样。世尊虽然看到他们不可能通达证悟,就不为他们开示导向证悟的法,但仍然为这类人宣说属于习行分的法,因此说出了“实谛的证得”等话。“阿阇世等”中的“等”字,应当知道包含了萨恰咖等人。世尊也是为他未来的习行而说法。因为导师预见到“未来教法将在铜掌岛立足,这个人会投生到那里的善家,出家后成为名叫黑佛护的长老,具足无碍解,成为大漏尽者”,所以为他说法,而他也确实如预见的那样成就了。巴利
Akusalassa kammassa katokāsatāya pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā ‘‘vipākāvaraṇena nivuta’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ kammāvaraṇādīhipi nivutatāya icchitattā. Tathā hi yathā devadattaṃ kokālikaṃ sunakkhattaṃ licchaviputtanti udāhaṭaṃ, yadipi bhagavā paṭivedhassa aṭṭhānataṃ disvā nibbedhabhāgiyadesanaṃ na deseti, vāsanābhāgiyaṃ pana tathārūpassa deseti evāti dassento ‘‘saccappaṭivedha’’ntiādimāha. Ajātasattuādīnanti ādisaddena saccakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tassāpi bhagavā anāgate vāsanatthāya dhammaṃ desesi. Satthā hi ‘‘anāgate tambapaṇṇidīpe sāsanaṃ patiṭṭhahissatī’’ti tatthāyaṃ kulaghare nibbatto pabbajitvā kāḷabuddharakkhitatthero nāma pabhinnapaṭisambhido mahākhīṇāsavo bhavissatīti idaṃ disvā dhammaṃ desesi, so ca tathā ahosīti.
“不圆满”是指完全没有达到能成熟果报的程度。“业不圆满”这句话,是针对与见依止、与见相应的业而说的。因此说:“显示了夹杂烦恼障的业障。”巴利
Asampuṇṇeti ekantato vipākadānasamatthatāvasena pāripūriṃ anupagate. Diṭṭhupanissayadiṭṭhisahagatassa kammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kamme asampuṇṇe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kilesantarāya missakaṃ kammantarāyaṃ dassetvā’’ti.
61 61. 在这里,由于它意指戒禁取,所以经中把“见”作为主要因素来把握。正如经中所说:“譬如牛行者布纳,以及裸形狗行者。”正是因为他们的邪见业受持不圆满,世尊才为他们宣说“布纳,有这四种业……”等法。通过那次开示,他们舍弃了那种见,安立于正见之中。巴利
61. Diṭṭhi panettha padhānabhāvena pāḷiyaṃ gahitā sīlabbataparāmāsassa adhippetattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yathā puṇṇañca govatikaṃ, acelañca kukkuravatika’’nti. Asampuṇṇattā eva hi tassa micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānassa tesaṃ bhagavā ‘‘cattārimāni, puṇṇa, kammānī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.81) dhammaṃ desesi. Tāya ca desanāya te taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissajjitvā sammatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu.
62 62. 因为熟练而清净,就是熟练清净。正是从初禅等出起之后,成为证得第二禅等的条件,所以叫做“出起”,因此说“出起即熟练清净”。有分出起就是有分的生起。因为有分心生起时,具足该心的人就叫做从等至出起。想与感受的息灭,就是远离解脱。巴利
62. Paguṇatāya vodānaṃ paguṇavodānaṃ. Tadeva paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyajjhānādiadhigamassa paccayattā vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma hotīti āha ‘‘vuṭṭhānaṃ paguṇavodāna’’nti. Bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavaṅguppatti. Bhavaṅgacitte hi uppanne taṃsamaṅgisamāpattito vuṭṭhito nāma hoti. Saññāvedayitaapagamo eva apagamavimokkho.
这个“出起”,是指前面所说的善巧,因为它是出起的因,所以叫出起。正如经文里说的:“清净也是从各种定中出起。”(《分别论》828)不过,因为从灭尽定出起没有被这段“出起”的经文所收录,所以《除迷论》里说:“从灭尽定出起,叫做经文之外的出起。”(《分别论注》828)如果有人声称“从灭出起到果等至”在经文中不存在,那就应该用这段经文来驳斥他:“对于从灭出起的人,非想非非想处以无间缘作为果等至的缘。”(《发趣论》1.1.417)巴利
Idaṃ vuṭṭhānanti idaṃ yathāvuttaṃ kosallaṃ vuṭṭhānahetubhāvato vuṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘vodānampi tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828). Imāya pana vuṭṭhānapāḷiyā asaṅgahitattā ‘‘nirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṃ pāḷimuttakavuṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 828) vuttaṃ. Ye pana ‘‘nirodhato phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhāna’’nti pāḷiyaṃ natthīti vadeyyuṃ, te ‘‘nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) imāya pāḷiyā paṭisedhetabbā.
63 这里说“这是他的依止”等等,应当理解为:通过了知依止等方式,说明以哪些根、以哪些胜劣差别,众生成为善的依止、恶的依止等,对这些的了知就是这里所要阐明的。这样说来,也就成立了根胜劣智与随眠依止智各自不共,以及根胜劣智与种种胜解智各自成为力。巴利
63.Ayaṃ cassa āsayoti ettha āsayajānanādinā yehi indriyehi yehi paroparehi sattā kalyāṇapāpāsayādikā honti, tesaṃ pajānanaṃ vibhāvetīti veditabbaṃ. Evañca katvā indriyaparopariyattaāsayānusayañāṇānaṃ visuṃ asādhāraṇatā, indriyaparopariyattanānādhimuttikatāñāṇānaṃ visuṃ balatā ca siddhā hoti.
这里说到“有力者”时,应当知道:所谓“有力趣向”,是指只属于欲贪等、不与其他人共有的特有自性。正如《无碍解道》3.21 中所说:“有力者舍断随眠。”巴利
Thāmagatoti ettha thāmagamanaṃ nāma aññesaṃ asādhāraṇo kāmarāgādīnaṃ eva āveṇiko sabhāvo veditabbo, yato ‘‘thāmagato anusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.21) vuttaṃ.
仅仅靠转向就能忆念,因为它是随愿而运作的。确实有这样说:“佛陀世尊的智系于意愿,佛陀世尊的智系于作意……”等等。因为就像一切知智一样,世尊的一切智都不依赖预备努力。巴利
Āvajjanamatteneva sarati ākaṅkhāyattavuttikattā. Vuttañhi ‘‘ākaṅkhapaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇaṃ, manasikārapaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇa’’ntiādi (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viya hi sabbaṃ bhagavato ñāṇaṃ parikammanirapekkhanti.
64 64. 从随烦恼解脱:这里,心等本身就是随烦恼,或者是能生业的障盖烦恼。在遍业、遍作修习、禅那成就、遍的状态、十四种调心、神通引摄等一切处,精进力都有极大的帮助,所以说“由精进修习力所产生”。似天等:存在于天中的,称为天;就像所说的净天眼,“似天”指最高的神通智。天住是四种色界禅那。由于依这四种禅那而生起和证得,所以称为天;以那些天为原因,所以称为天——这样说以显示其含义。依止天住:是由色界第四禅作为依止缘而生起的,所以由天所依止,因此称为天——这样说以显示其含义。文字学者们在游戏等中诵读“天”字,所以说那一切都应随顺声明家的教导。因为前三种含义是依“游戏”义而说明,其余的则是依“光耀”与“趣向”义而说明。巴利
64.Upakkilesavimuttattāti ettha cittādi eva upakkilesā, nibbattakassa vā kammassa pāribandhakilesā. Kasiṇakammaparikammajhānanibbattanakasiṇabhāvo cuddasavidhena cittaparidamanaṃ abhiññābhinīhāroti sabbatthāpi vīriyabalassa bahūpakārattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyabhāvanābalanibbatta’’nti. Dibbasadisattāti dibbe bhavanti dibbaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ pasādacakkhu, dibbaṃ viyāti dibbaṃ, aggataṃ abhiññāṇaṃ. Dibbavihāro cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Tesaṃ vasena nibbattitvā paṭiladdhabbattā dibbaṃ, tena dibbahetukattā dibbanti vuttanti dasseti. Dibbavihārasannissitattāti rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānena nissayapaccayena nibbattattā, tena dibbanissitaṃ dibbanti dasseti. Divusaddaṃ akkharacintakā kīḷādīsu paṭhantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabba’’nti. Purimā hi tayo atthā kīḷatthassa vasena, itare jutigatiatthavaseneva dassitāti.
“人的活动范围”,即人界。因为它是刹那当下的,时间极短,所以无法看见。以“临近死”等说法,是依相续当下来说明“正在死时、正在结生时”。以“与愚痴流注相应”等说法,是显示众生低劣、优胜等状态皆以愚痴等业为因,并且是流注果。这些是天眼的近因,所以是天眼的基础,因此说“与天眼一同成就”。它们其实就是天眼的资具智。巴利
Manussūpacāranti manussagocaraṃ. Daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā ittarakhaṇattā khaṇapaccuppannassa. ‘‘Āsannacutikā’’tiādinā santatipaccuppannavasena ‘‘cavamāne upapajjamāne’’ti vuttanti dasseti. ‘‘Mohanissandayuttattā’’tiādinā sattānaṃ hīnapaṇītattādibhāvassa mohādikammanidānahetukataṃ, nissandaphalatañca dasseti. Dibbacakkhussa pādakaṃ etesanti dibbacakkhupādakāni. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhantī’’ti. Tāni hissa paribhaṇḍañāṇāni.
“领受”就是承担、接受。那些有业之领受的法,就叫作业领受。前一种解释是:有应当被领受的种种业。第二种解释则是:能让人领受业,所以叫业领受。由邪见所致的业领受,称为邪见业领受。这里用的是工具格,表示原因。巴利
Samādīyantīti samādānāni, kammāni samādānāni etesanti kammasamādānā. Samādātabbanānāvidhakammāti attho purime atthe, dutiye pana kammāni samādāpentīti kammasamādānā, micchādiṭṭhiyā kammasamādānā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, hetuatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.
所谓“那语”,就是指诽谤圣者的那种话。所谓“那心”,就是指能发起这种诽谤的心。所谓“那见”,就是指以错误执取去诋毁圣者的那种邪执、邪固守。这里的意思是这样的:就像一位因缘具足的比丘,戒律清净,又修成了定并安住其中,即使他生起觉察稍慢,也能在现世中迅速以通慧证得正智,或者在还有剩余执取时证得不来果。同样,如果有人诽谤圣者,不离开上面所说的那种心和见,反而以不相称的方式说“尊者,我对您说了上面那些话”,却不通过认错来求得对方原谅,那么他身坏命终之后,必定堕入地狱。对于这些人,若是对圣者生起净信,那么向他求原谅,并且舍弃、放下那些恶语等,就是这里的“弃舍”。没有比这更有罪过的了,因为它会带来一切不利,毁坏一切利益与安乐。巴利
Taṃ vācanti taṃ ariyānaṃ upavadanavācaṃ. Taṃ cittanti samuṭṭhāpakacittaṃ. Taṃ diṭṭhinti yena micchāgāhena ariye anuddhaṃseti, micchābhinivesaṃ. Ayampettha attho – yathā nāma hetusampannassa bhikkhuno visuddhaṃ sīlaṃ, samādhiñca sampādetvā ṭhitassa dandho satuppādo khippābhiññāya diṭṭheva dhamme aññā, sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā. Evamevaṃ yo ariyūpavādī yathāvuttacittadiṭṭhīhi apakkamitvā appatirūpaṃ sabhāvaṃ ‘‘mayā, bhante, tumhākaṃ upari vutta’nti accayadesanāya te na khamāpeti, so kāyassa bhedā niraye evāti. Tesu pasannacittassa khamāpanañhettha tesaṃ vācādīnaṃ pahānaṃ paṭinissaggova. Ito sāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi sabbānatthavidhānato, sabbahitasukhaparidhaṃsanato ca.
“身坏”中的“身”字,在这里是“自身”的同义词,所以说“舍离执取蕴后”。“紧接着那之后”就是指那被称为死的蕴舍离之后。“后”这个词,有“再生蕴”的意思,也可能是指“以非先前存在之事物为所缘”,或者只是用来限定界限。在这几种含义中,针对第一种说“于摄取再生蕴”,针对最后一种则说“从死后向上”。巴利
Kāyassabhedāti idha kāyasaddo attabhāvapariyāyoti āha ‘‘upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā’’ti. Tadanantaranti tassa maraṇasaṅkhātassa khandhapariccāgassa anantaraṃ. Abhinibbattakkhandhattho parasaddo, anorimabhūtavatthuvisayo vā siyā, avadhivisesanamattaṃ vā. Tesu purimaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe’’ti, pacchimassa pana vasena ‘‘cutito uddha’’nti.
所谓“以相反的方式说”,就是指“善行、妙行”这类说法。“杀戮”就是杀害。巴利
Vuttavipariyāyenāti ‘‘suṭṭhu caritaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā carita’’ntiādinā. Hanananti ghātanaṃ.
“因与非因”就是“处与非处”。这里把思与思相应法——也就是通向地狱等趣和涅槃的道,即业——拿来理解后,才说“唯是业的判别”。“业果差别”是指业果的差异、业果的分别。它不能决意,就像第八力、第九力那样;也不能变化,就像类似的神变智那样;这就说明它不具备与那些力相似的能力。或者说,不能像禅那等智那样决意和变化。虽然这里把禅那等的省察智称为第六力,并说它是有寻有伺的,但因为离开禅那等就没有省察,所以是把与禅那等俱行的智也包含在内而这样说的。又或者,为了说明一切知智不能像禅那等的作用那样完成一切力的作用,所以《分别论根本复注》说:“不能成为禅那而决意,不能成为神通而变化。”不过,不应认为任何力本身就是禅那或神通。巴利
Kāraṇākāraṇanti ṭhānāṭṭhānaṃ. Cetanācetanāsampayuttadhamme nirayādinibbānagāmipaṭipadābhūte kammanti gahetvā āha ‘‘kammaparicchedamevā’’ti. Kammavipākantaraṃ kammavipākaviseso kammavipākassa vibhāgo. Appetuṃ na sakkoti aṭṭhamanavamabalāni viya, taṃsadisaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ viya vikubbituṃ, etenassa balasadisatañca nivāreti. Jhānādiñāṇaṃ viya vā appetuṃ , vikubbituñca. Yadipi hi jhānādipaccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ idha chaṭṭhaṃ balanti tassa savitakkasavicāratā vuttā, tathāpi jhānādīhi vinā paccavekkhaṇā natthīti jhānādisahagataṃ ñāṇaṃ tadantogadhaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Atha vā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jhānādikiccaṃ viya na sabbaṃ balakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ, iddhi hutvā vikubbituñca na sakkotī’’ti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 831) vuttaṃ, na pana kassaci balassa jhānaiddhibhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 合理理趣会合的注释巴利
3. Yuttihārasampātavaṇṇanā
65 65. 当善法被对立面强力压制时,它们根本没办法生起;即使已经生起,也没能力正确完成自己的作用,所以就跟还没生起一样。为了说明只要挡住对立面,善法就能发挥自己的作用,才说“以意为第六……将会成为”。所谓“住者”,是指安住的因由。这里的“住者”也是同样的道理,由此表明:因为守护了心,就会像前面所说的那样,决定性地趣向正思惟的所缘。所谓“像前面所说的那样”,是指不给邪思惟留下机会,因为已经清净了出离寻等寻。所谓“不颠倒”,是指从身体等的不净等执取。“堕落的怖畏”是对恶趣的怖畏。而这一切义,也都是“正思惟的所缘将成为正见”等中所说的义,因为依道理而相应,并非无因。巴利
65. Paṭipakkhapaṭibāḷhā kusalā dhammā uppajjitumeva na sakkonti, uppannāpi sammadeva attano kiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya anuppannasadisāti paṭipakkhanivāraṇena kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ kiccakaraṇabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘manacchaṭṭhāni…pe… bhavissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Viharantassāti viharaṇahetu. Viharantoti etthāpi eseva nayo, tena rakkhitacittatā vuttanayena ekantato sammāsaṅkappagocaratāya ca saṃvattatīti dasseti. Vuttanayenāti micchāsaṅkappānaṃ avasaraṃ adatvā visodhitanekkhammādivitakkatāya. Aviparītamevāti kāyādiasubhādito ādānaṃ. Vinipātabhayanti duggatibhayaṃ. Sabbopi cāyamatthoti ‘‘sammāsaṅkappagocaro sammādiṭṭhi bhavissatī’’tiādīsu attho yuttiyā yutto eva anarūpakāraṇabhāvato.
4. 足处理趣会合等的注释巴利
4. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātādivaṇṇanā
66 或者,因为已守护心者就杂染而言,能使三种善行得以圆满,所以说“守护心”。在这里,这种心得守护的状态,就是身善行等三种善行的近依处。应当这样理解这里的含义。“依靠自己的”是指不依赖他人。巴利
66. Yasmā vā saṃkilesato rakkhitacittassa tīṇi sucaritāni pāripūriṃ gacchanti, tasmā rakkhitacittassāti ettha yāyaṃ rakkhitacittatā, sā kāyasucaritādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānanti evamettha attho veditabbo. Attādhīnanti attaparādhīnaṃ.
正因为“由此”这个说法抓住了原因,也就同时抓住了结果。巴利
Tato evāti kāraṇaggahaṇena phalassa gahitattā eva.
68 这里“iti”这个词,说的是“被守护”。巴利
68.Tatthaitisaddoti ‘‘paripālīyatī’’ti itisaddo.
73-4 在巴利文中说“五根被三蕴所摄”。这里,信根、精进根、念根摄取了应当清净的巴帝摩卡等三种戒,因为戒是需要清净的。所谓“由这些根”,就是说戒蕴被它们所摄。定根和慧根则摄取了定蕴和慧蕴,这个道理很明显。其余的部分也是这样,所以说“从这以后……都只是按照前面所说的方式”。巴利
73-4. Pāḷiyaṃ pañcindriyāni tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitānīti ettha saddhāvīriyasatindriyehi pātimokkhādi tividhaṃ sīlaṃ gahitaṃ sodhetabbattā. Tesanti tehi sīlakkhandho saṅgahito. Samādhipaññindriyehi samādhipaññākkhandhā gahitāti pākaṭoyamattho, tathā sesampīti āha ‘‘ito paresu…pe… vuttanayamevā’’ti.
76 这里说的“因、从因生起、缘、从缘生起”,其中因缘的分类,下面已经讲过了。巴利
76.Hetuhetusamuppannapaccayapaccayuppannasaṅkhātassāti ettha hetupaccayavibhāgo heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
杂理趣结合注释巴利
Missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā
现在,因为在诸经中,理趣结合的开示是指明诸理趣的运用方式,而不像《理趣分别》的开示那样仅指明理趣的自体,所以,为了依照《藏论》中传来的方式,用另外一些相反的角度来说明理趣结合的方法,便说了“再者”等话。其中,为了说明明与无明——也就是善心与不善心的生起——当中的无贪与贪、无嗔与嗔,也是以辗转相续的方式生起而成为起因,所以说了“六法……是根”。而且,正如以起因的方式成为前导,同样,通过自己掌控的作用,也能获得前导性,因此说“对有增上者,是增上;对一切心生起,是根”。“无贪的”,是指与无贪相应的心生起。“以出离欲”,是指以善欲而言。“出离”这个词常用于出家等场合。正如所说:巴利
Idāni yasmā suttesu hārānaṃ yojanānayadassanattā hārasampātadesanā hāravibhaṅgadesanā viya na hārasarūpamattadassanattā, tasmā peṭakopadese āgatanayānusārena aparehi vipariyāyehi hārasampātayojanāvidhiṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha vijjāvijjāya kusalākusalacittappavattiyā alobhādosalobhadosāpi paramparabhāvena pavattanti nidānabhāvatoti dassento ‘‘cha dhammā…pe… mūlānī’’ti āha. Yathā ca nidānabhāvena pubbaṅgamatā, evaṃ attano vasevattanenāpi pubbaṅgamatā labbhatevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sādhipatikānaṃ adhipati, sabbacittuppādānaṃ indriyānī’’ti. Alobhassāti alobhayuttassa cittuppādassa. Nekkhammacchandenāti kusalacchandena. Nekkhammasaddo pabbajjādīsu niruḷho. Vuttañhi –
“ 出家、初禅、涅槃和观,
所有善法,都被称为‘出离’。”巴利
‘‘Pabbajjā paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ, nibbānañca vipassanā; Sabbepi kusalā dhammā, ‘nekkhamma’nti pavuccare’’ti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 109; dī. ni. ṭī. 2.359; a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.66) –
在这两者当中,这里指的是善法。因此说“以善欲”。这是以出离欲作为亲依止缘,而不是作为增上缘。这里要表达的意思是:如果有一个以无贪为主导的心生起,那么意就以作为亲依止缘的出离欲为前导,而成为该心的前导。剩下两句也是同样的道理。巴利
Tesu idha kusalā dhammā adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kusalacchandenā’’ti. Nekkhammacchandena upanissayabhūtena, na adhipatibhūtena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – alobhappadhāno ce cittuppādo hoti, nekkhammacchandena upanissayabhūtena mano tassa pubbaṅgamo hoti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
从诸法以意为前导的那一刻起,意就成了它们中最上、最殊胜的,所以说“意为胜”,也就是“意对它们诸法来说是最殊胜的”等等。“意所成性”是指由意所造等状态;而这个状态正是意以俱生等缘的方式成为它们之缘的状态,所以说“意所成……是缘”。“而它们”这里,“而”这个字是用来显示特殊含义的,它表明:虽然对诸法来说,欲等也是缘,但因为是区别于根等缘的特别之缘,所以特别依据意而说“意所成”。其中,“由欲所发起而引导”是指以前面所说的出离等欲,正确地向上引导而生起,从那里产生出来的意思。正因为是从出离寻等生起的,所以是无浊思惟所生起。由于与相应的意识界触共同安立,所以是触所集起。正如所说:“诸比丘,触了才感受,触了才认知,触了才思惟。”
“这是意业”:不造作身表和语表的动作,由具足信、净信的心所转起的,这就是善的意业。而它有三种:与无贪俱行、与无瞋俱行、与正见俱行。巴利
Yadaggena tesaṃ dhammānaṃ mano pubbaṅgamaṃ, tadaggena tesaṃ jeṭṭhaṃ, padhānañcāti vuttaṃ ‘‘manoseṭṭhāti mano tesaṃ dhammāna’’ntiādi. Manomayatā manena katādibhāvo, so ca manassa tesaṃ sahajātādinā paccayabhāvo evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘manomayāti…pe… paccayo’’ti. Te panāti ettha pana-saddo visesatthadīpako, tenetaṃ dasseti – yadipi tesaṃ dhammānaṃ chandādayopi paccayā eva, indriyādipaccayena pana savisesaṃ paccayabhūtassa manasseva vaseneva vuttaṃ ‘‘manomayā’’ti. Tattha chandasamudānītāti yathāvuttanekkhammādichandena sammā uddhamuddhaṃ nītā, tato samudāgatāti attho. Tato eva nekkhammavitakkādito samuppannattā anāvilasaṅkappasamuṭṭhānā. Tajjāmanoviññāṇadhātusamphassena sahādhiṭṭhānato phassasamodhānā. ‘‘Phuṭṭho, bhikkhave, vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) hi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ manokammanti kāyaṅgavācaṅgacopanaṃ akatvā saddhāsamannāgatena pasannena manasā pavattaṃ idaṃ kusalaṃ manokammaṃ. Taṃ pana anabhijjhāsahagataṃ, abyāpādasahagataṃ, sammādiṭṭhisahagatanti tividhaṃ hoti.
“说”的意思是:通过不妄语等方式,以语支动摇所转起的语表,去成就应当成就的事。因此,从身门转起的善语业也被包含在内。正如后文将会说:“由于语表的扩展,也由于这样地认可,所以说。”一切语业,按真实等分为四种。“作”的意思是:以由身支动摇所转起的身表,就对自己和他人有益或有害、有原因或无原因之事,去成就应当成就的事。因此,从语门转起的善身业也被包含在内。后文也将这样说:“由于身表的扩展,也由于这样地认可,所以作。”(《尼提道义注》76 杂迦哈罗集释)如果从业道的角度来把握,按杀生等,这可分为三种。因此说“这样显示了十善业道”。按十福业事来说,这首偈颂的意义也能成立。正如后文将会说:“他具有净信心”等等。“说”或“作”,或者纯粹由意转起——句中的“或”表示不确定的意思。解释正是依据这一点。巴利
Bhāsatīti avisaṃvādanādinā vācaṅgacopanāvasena pavattentiyā vacīviññattiyā sādhetabbaṃ sādhetīti attho, tena kāyadvārato pavattakusalavacīkammampi saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘vacīviññattivipphārato, tathā sādiyanato ca bhāsatī’’ti. Sabbampi vacīkammaṃ saccādivasena catubbidhaṃ. Karotīti attano, paresañca hitāhitāni kāraṇākāraṇehi kāyaṅgacopanāvasena pavattentiyā kāyaviññattiyā sādhetabbaṃ sādhetīti attho, tena vacīdvārato pavattakusalakāyakammampi saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘kāyaviññattivipphārato, tathā sādiyanato ca karotī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 76 missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā). Kammapathavasena gayhamāne pāṇātipātādivasena taṃ tividhaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘iti dasakusalakammapathādassitā’’ti. Dasapuññakiriyavatthuvasenāpi gāthāya attho yujjati. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘so pasannacitto’’tiādi. Bhāsati vā karoti vā kevalaṃ manasā pavattatīti aniyamattho vā-saddo. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ.
所谓“十种善业”,指的是十善业道之业,或者按照后面将要说明的方式,指的是被称为十福业事的善业。有人问:在那里不是只说了布施等三种福业事吗?确实如此,但那是因为其余的福业事都包含在这三种里面。巴利
Dasavidhassa kusalakammassāti dasavidhassa kusalakammapathakammassa, vakkhamānanayena vā dasapuññakiriyavatthusaṅkhātassa kusalakammassa. Nanu tattha dānādimayaṃ tividhameva puññakiriyavatthu vuttanti? Saccaṃ, taṃ pana itaresaṃ tadantogadhattā.
“乐跟随”是简略的说法。为了详细说明乐如何跟随,才说了“在此,有人”等等。其中,“如此存在”即这样的状态,意思是:此人尚未断除随眠,而是由能生起乐受的触所生起的。巴利
‘‘Sukhamanvetī’’ti saṅkhepena vuttaṃ sukhānugamaṃ vitthārena dassento ‘‘idhassu puriso’’tiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ santanti evaṃ bhūtaṃ, appahīnānusayo hutvā sukhavedanīyaphassasambhūtanti attho.
在这里,通过“那,意……”等偈颂的意义来抉择四圣谛。因为最初在确定蕴等法时,是以蕴为入口来宣说诸谛的;又因为众生的意乐各不相同,为了让修行者在种种观行方法上获得善巧,也为了显示前后文的关联,所以才这样说:“如此……应当抉择”。在以谛为入口抉择了乐味等之后,为了把教说理趣会合结合起来,所以说了“其中,以集……”等,它的意义和前面所讲的一样。这里还有一些在意义上没有详细解释的内容,应当知道是因为前面已经讲过的道理,以及它的意义本来就很明显的缘故。巴利
Tattha ‘‘yaṃ mano’’tiādinā gāthātthavasena catusaccaṃ niddhāreti. Ādito vavatthāpitesu khandhādīsu khandhamukhena saccānaṃ kathitattā sattānaṃ bhinnarucibhāvato nānānayehi vipassanābhūmikosallatthaṃ, pubbāparasambandhadassanatthañca evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ…pe… niddhāretabbānī’’ti. Saccamukhena assādādike niddhāretvā desanāhārasampātaṃ yojetuṃ ‘‘tattha samudayenā’’tiādimāha, taṃ vuttanayameva. Yañhettha aññampi atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā, uttānatthattā cāti veditabbaṃ.
“以思量为特相”这句话,是指以思量为因;另一种读法是“由于思量相”。因为不存在热望,也不存在造作活动。由于具备那种净信,意才被称为“净信”;把那种净信的作用安立在意上之后,就说“由于不浑浊,由于对所缘的信解,以清净的意”。同样,“由于认可”这句话,不必等到用言语说出,单凭触就已经认可、接受了。第二个“同样,由于认可”,是指身体应当做的事,就像已经做了一样,通过言语的安排而完成。同样,“由于致力”,意思是乐怎样随行,就怎样积集。由于那些原因,也就是以清净的意、言语和行为等为因,所以说“由此”。在“不向他处”这个意义上,“由此”就是正由于那些原因。一个人以清净的意说了什么、做了什么,乐就正是由此追随他。由于是乐受的状态,即乐受的性质;由于是可意的状态,即可爱的性质。因为业有能力引生异熟果报,而不是异熟果已经生起,所以说“作了……追随”。这是依于所作之因来说的,意思是业以已作之事为因。“不相续”是指在某个相续中生起的业,不会转移到别的相续去。巴利
Mananalakkhaṇeti mananalakkhaṇahetu. ‘‘Mananalakkhaṇenā’’ti vā pāṭho. Īhābhāvato byāpārābhāvato. Yena pasādena samannāgatattā mano ‘‘pasanno’’ti vutto, tassa pasādassa kiccaṃ mane āropetvā āha ‘‘akālusiyato, ārammaṇassa okappanato ca pasannenā’’ti. Tathā sādiyanatoti vācāya vattabbaṃ avatvāva phassasādiyanato anujānato. Dutiye tathā sādiyanatoti kāyena kātabbaṃ yathā kataṃ hoti, tathā vācāya saṃvidhānato. Tathā pasutattāti yathā sukhamanveti, tathā upacitattā evāti attho. Tatoti tato kāraṇā, manasā pasannena, bhāsanena, karaṇena ca hetunāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anaññatthāti etasmiṃ pana atthe. Tatoti tato eva. Yo hi pasannamano tena yaṃ bhāsanaṃ, karaṇañca, tato eva naṃ sukhamanvetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sātabhāvatoti sātavedanābhāvato. Iṭṭhabhāvatoti manāpabhāvato. Kammato vipākuppattiphaladānasamatthabhāvena kammassa nibbattattā vipākasseva anibbattattāti āha ‘‘katū…pe… anvetīti vutta’’nti kāraṇāyatta vuttitoti katabhāvahetukattā kammassāti adhippāyo. Asaṅkantitoti yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ nibbattaṃ, tadaññasantānā saṅkamanato.
由于具足增上缘,即依俱生增上的力量而具有增上相应。因为这里所说的“前导”,是指俱生诸法以与它们相应的意为主导。正是由于这个原因,才说“由此”,即仅仅因为具足增上缘。“意的”是宾语用法,与“那些法”相连。善的状态能够成立,是因为净信以如理作意为因。有人问:在分别说答复中,不是说“那些声闻生起信”吗?这不是信,应当知道,那只是以类似信的方式把不善法如此称呼而已。正如后面将要说的:“这不是净信”等等。乐跟随,这一说法能够成立,是因为业有能力给予果报。也就是说,如同所作的业有能力给予果报,这样所作的业就被称为已积集。巴利
Ādhipaccayogatoti sahajātādhipativasena ādhipaccayuttattā. Sahajātadhammānañhi taṃsampayuttassa manassa vasena pubbaṅgamatā idhādhippetā. Tato evāti ādhipaccayogato eva. Manassāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tesaṃ dhammānanti sambandho. Kusalabhāvo yujjati pasādassa yonisomanasikārahetukattā . Nanu vibhajjabyākaraṇesu tesaṃ sāvakānaṃ saddhā uppajjatīti? Nāyaṃ saddhā, tadākārā pana akusalā dhammā tathā vuccantīti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nāyaṃ pasādo’’tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 76 missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā). Sukhaṃ anvetīti yujjati kammassa phaladāne samatthabhāvato. Yathā hi kataṃ kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ upacitanti vuccatīti.
这里的“意思索”,应理解为依出离而生的喜俱思索与舍俱思索,因为这部分是以善为主题的。然而,这些思索只依于心才生起,不依于其他,所以说“意是意思索的近因”。在“善一方的近因”中,先说善的触:它通过俱生等方式,成为善的受蕴、想蕴、行蕴的缘。经中说:“比丘们,触了才感受,触了才认知,触了才思虑。”受等也应这样理解。至于信等作为缘,那更不必多说。“一切”指四地。欲界的善法,按各自情况,也能成为四地善法的缘;其他地的善法也是如此。巴利
Manopavicārā idha nekkhammasitā somanassūpavicārā, upekkhūpavicārā ca veditabbā kusalādhikārattā. Te pana yasmā cittaṃ nissāyeva pavattanti, nānissāya, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mano manopavicārānaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kusalapakkhassa padaṭṭhānanti ettha kusalo tāva phasso kusalassa vedanākkhandhassa saññākkhandhassa saṅkhārakkhandhassa sahajātādinā paccayo hoti. ‘‘Phuṭṭho, bhikkhave, vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vedanādīnampi veditabbaṃ. Saddhādīnampi paccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Sabbassāti catubhūmakassa. Kāmāvacarā hi kusalā dhammā yathārahaṃ catubhūmakassāpi kusalassa paccayā honti, evaṃ itarabhūmakāpi.
因为已经说过“以清净的信心而说”,所以这里特别指的是以正语为条件的言语,因此说“说就是正语”。这里的意思是:“说”这个词,就已经包含了正语。同样地,“做”就是正业,这里的道理也是一样的。只有安住在身业和语业都极其清净的人,才有活命的清净,而不是其他人,所以说“它们是正命的立足处”。这里的“它们”指的是正语和正业。再者,因为安立在活命第八戒即活命清净戒上的人,能够断除已生起的不善法、不让未生的不善法生起,也能让未生的善法生起、使已生的善法圆满;同样地,只有安住在正精进的人,才能生起摧毁对身体等生起的净想等的正念,因此说“正命……中略……立足处”。上等戒就是巴帝摩卡防护,它是依靠信心而成就的,所以说“那是戒的立足处”。巴利
‘‘Pasannena manasā bhāsatī’’ti vuttattā visesato sammāvācāpaccayaṃ bhāsanaṃ idhādhippetanti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāsatīti sammāvācā’’ti. Tatthāyamadhippāyo ‘‘bhāsatīti yamidaṃ padaṃ, iminā sammāvācā gahitā hotī’’ti. Karotīti sammākammantoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Suparisuddhe kāyavacīkamme ṭhitassa ājīvapārisuddhi, na itarassāti vuttaṃ ‘‘te sammāājīvassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Tattha teti sammāvācākammantā. Yasmā pana ājīvaṭṭhamake sīle patiṭṭhitassa uppannānuppannānaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ pahānānuppādanāni, anuppannuppannānaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ uppādanapāripūriyā ca sambhavanti, tathā sammāvāyāme ṭhitasseva kāyādīsu subhasaññādividdhaṃsinī sammāsati sambhavati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāājīvo…pe…padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaro, saddhāsādhano ca soti āha ‘‘taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
“它们”指的是身业和语业。所谓“以业为缘”,意思是它们以善业为因。巴利
Tesanti kāyavacīkammānaṃ. Kammapaccayatāyāti kusalakammahetukatāya.
词义也像前面所说的那样,即“因为能思量,所以叫意;因为能了知所缘,所以叫识”等等。巴利
Padattho ca vuttanayenāti ‘‘mananato ārammaṇavijānanato’’tiādinā.
这个“回转”是指按同类法和异类法而说的回转。这里,对善根、正道等的辨别,是同类法的回转;对无明、有、渴爱的辨别,是异类法的回转。巴利
Ayaṃāvaṭṭoti ayaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena āvaṭṭo. Ettha hi kusalamūlasammattamaggādiniddhāraṇā sabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanā. Avijjābhavataṇhānaṃ niddhāraṇā visabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanā.
在区分理趣中,关于安立处与地的区分已经按照所说的方式讲过了,而且很容易理解。为了显示法的分别,才说了“此非”等话。其中,先指出“不应按字面来理解”这部经,说明它是需要引申义才能理解的经,然后用“凡是……”等话加以解释。为什么说“唯随苦”呢?难道在任何情况下,心怀利益他人之愿的都只是善法吗?这里并不是针对这种情况说的,而是针对那类错误的决意——把非法说成法、把法说成非法,这种错误决意是针对外道师而说的,他们是一切无益的种子,排斥一切利益与安乐的方便,由于人们推崇他们不真实的功德,这种邪决意便随之生起。世间若有人依靠邪恶的见解,去阻挡别人哪怕只想做一点点功德,这样的人尚且应受呵责,更何况去阻挡在圣者教法中正行道的人呢?所以,对他们的推崇、赞美和亲近,只会带来苦的结果。正如经中所说:“愚人!我并非吝惜阿拉汉果,但这确实是你自己的恶见……长久以来带来不利和痛苦。”又说:“称赞应受呵责者”,以及“一切无益的根本,就是亲近愚人。”巴利
Vibhattihāre padaṭṭhānabhūmivibhāgā vuttanayā, suviññeyyā cāti dhammavibhāgameva dassento ‘‘nayida’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘nayidaṃ yathārutavasena gahetabba’’nti suttassa neyyatthataṃ vatvā ‘‘yohī’’tiādinā taṃ vivarati. ‘‘Dukkhameva anvetī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu yattha katthaci hitesitā kusalamevāti? Nayidamīdisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, adhammaṃ pana dhammoti, dhammañca pana adhammoti dīpanena lokassa sabbānatthabījabhūtesu sakalahitasukhupāyapaṭikkhepakesu titthakaresu asantaguṇasambhāvanavasena pavattamicchādhimokkhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yo hi loke appamattakampi puññaṃ kātukāmaṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ nissāya paṭibāhati, sopi gārayho, kimaṅgaṃ pana ariyavinaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ paṭibāhantesūti dukkhaphalāva tattha sambhāvanāpasaṃsā payirupāsanā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘na kho ahaṃ, moghapurisa, arahattassa maccharāyāmi, apica tuyhevetaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ…pe… dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.7), ‘‘yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati (su. ni. 663; saṃ. ni. 1.180, 181; a. ni. 4.3; netti. 92), sabbassāpi anatthassa mūlaṃ bālūpasevanā’’ti ca.
这里说的“经”,是指《法句》的第一首偈颂:“心为先导……句”(《法句》1、2)。“它的”,是指正在被注释的这部经。巴利
Idañhi suttanti ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā…pe…pada’’nti (dha. pa. 1, 2) paṭhamaṃ gāthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Etassāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānasuttassa.
作用施设,是指对被称为增上缘的作用所作的安立。主施设,是指对主导性的安立。俱生施设,是指对那些法与心一同生起的安立。巴利
Kiccapaññattīti adhipatipaccayasaṅkhātassa kiccassa paññāpanaṃ. Padhānapaññattīti padhānabhāvassa paññāpanā. Sahajātapaññattīti tesaṃ dhammānaṃ manasā sahabhāvapaññāpanā.
“大种等”里的“等”字是表示列举未尽的意思,凭这个“等”字,一切离不开大种而独立存在的色法就都被包含进来了。巴利
Mahābhūtātīti itisaddo ādiattho, tena mahābhūtāvinābhāvī sabbo rūpadhammo saṅgayhati.
“意先导”这个复合词里,“意”只是这个词的一个组成部分,所以说“并非字面上的清净”。因此才说“单从字面看,‘意先导’是字面上的清净”。“如影随形,不离不弃”这句只是用来说明快乐跟随的一个比喻,并没有完整表达这里真正要说的意思。而“快乐就跟随他”这句,才完整表达了这里真正要说的意思,所以说它“既做到了字面上的清净,也做到了开端上的清净”。巴利
‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā’’ti samāsapade ‘‘mano’’ti padaṃ tadavayavamattanti āha ‘‘neva padasuddhī’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘manopubbaṅgamāti padasuddhī’’ti. ‘‘Chāyāva anapāyinī’’ti idaṃ sukhānugamassa udāharaṇamattaṃ, na yathādhippetatthaparisamāpanaṃ. ‘‘Sukhamanvetī’’ti pana yathādhippetatthaparisamāpananti vuttaṃ ‘‘padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi cā’’ti.
“单一性”是就“意先导”等共同的特性来说的。其余几句也是这样。“差异性”则是说:就“意先导”等共性所说的法而言,那上面的信不再停留在执持上,而是安立在被称为“净信”的特殊状态中。其余几句也是同样的道理。信以润泽为本性,能去除像无信那样的粗涩过失,所以说“由镇伏嗔恨”。“于外”是就可信的对象而说的。“随信解”是指不进入所缘、不投入所缘,只是信解。巴利
Ekattatāti manopubbaṅgamādisāmaññaṃ sandhāya vadati. Evaṃ sesesupi. Vemattatā ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādinā sāmaññato vuttadhamme pasādo dhāraṇāya nivattetvā pasannasaṅkhāte visese avaṭṭhāpanato. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Pasādo sinehasabhāvo, assaddhiyaṃ viya lūkhasabhāvaṃ dosaṃ vinodetīti āha ‘‘byāpādavikkhambhanato’’ti. Bahiddhāti saddheyyavatthuṃ sandhāyāha. Okappanatoti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā anupakkhanditvā saddahanato.
“可施物等”在这里,“等”字包含了悚惧、愧、遍业处、圆相等。“可爱所缘等”在这里,“等”字应当理解为摄入了可爱所缘、中等所缘、门法、作意等。同样地,“触”也是如此——就像受等以可爱所缘等为缘,触也是这样,这里的“如是”一词只是在表明这种缘的共通性。“受等”指的是受等三个蕴。而对于识来说,“受等”是就名色而说的。巴利
Deyyadhammādayoti ettha ādisaddena saṃvegahirottappakasiṇamaṇḍalādayo saṅgayhanti. Iṭṭhārammaṇādayoti ādisaddena iṭṭhamajjhattārammaṇā, dvāradhammā, manasikāroti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā phassoti yathā vedanādīnaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇādayo paccayo, evaṃ phassopīti paccayatāsāmaññameva upasaṃharati tathā-saddo. Vedanādīnanti hi vedanādayo tayo khandhā gahitā. Viññāṇassa vedanādayoti nāmarūpaṃ sandhāya vadati.
“戒所成的无嗔是它的近因”这句话,是因为戒以安忍为核心。所谓“他依止”,就是持续投入、令它生起。所谓“他”,就是这样修习善心的人。从“未生”等语句开始,是在说明通过修习而断除和确立的过程,依着能导向穿透的方面,辨析偈颂的含义后加以确立;也可以这样理解,所以依着能熏习的方面,在近因的解释中被引用。巴利
‘‘Sīlamayassa adoso padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ khantipadhānattā sīlassa. Adhiṭṭhātīti anuyuñjati uppādeti. Soti evaṃ kusalacittaṃ bhāvento. ‘‘Anuppannāna’’ntiādinā bhāvanāpahānasamāropanāni dassento nibbedhabhāgiyavasena gāthāya atthaṃ vicinitvā samāropeti, evampi sakkā yojetunti vāsanābhāgiyavasena padaṭṭhānaniddese udāharīyati.
像这样,先通过“诸法以意为先导”这首偈颂,说明了“理趣分句摄接”的解说方式;现在再用另一首偈颂来说明,所以说了“如此布施者所得福……”等。其中,“修所成”就是指由智慧修习所成的。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti gāthāya vasena hārasampātayojanāvidhiṃ dassetvā idāni gāthāntarena dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā dadato puñña’’ntiādimāha. Tattha bhāvanāmayanti paññābhāvanāmayaṃ.
“无贪是善根”等说法,是因为布施等以无贪等为主导才如此宣说的;而且在每一处,都要把“所说”这个词带进来配合理解。“它们”指贪等。“出离”则只是就般涅槃而言。巴利
‘‘Alobho kusalamūla’’ntiādi dānādīnaṃ alobhādipadhānattā vuttaṃ, sabbattha ca ‘‘vutta’’nti padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Tesanti rāgādīnaṃ. Nissaraṇanti ca parinibbānameva sandhāya vadati.
具有舍离之戒、以无贪为意乐、在诸欲中看见过患的人,才能真正圆满其戒。因此说“布施者……近因”。在这里,粗的烦恼是指违犯位,它的断除应当以彼分断来了知。中的是指缠缚位。细的是指随眠位。所作地是指漏尽者的境地。巴利
Pariccāgasīlo alobhajjhāsayo kāmesu ādīnavadassāvī sammadeva sīlaṃ paripūretīti āha ‘‘dadato…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Idha oḷārikā nāma kilesā vītikkamāvatthānaṃ, tappahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānena veditabbaṃ. Majjhimānanti pariyuṭṭhānāvatthānaṃ. Sukhumānanti anusayāvatthānaṃ. Katāvībhūmi nti khīṇāsavabhūmiṃ.
布施的人:以与道相应的无贪,对包括天界众生的世间给予无畏的布施。福:指出世间的善。自制的人:以道所包含的正语、正业、正命,从见一处等杂染中,靠道的自制而自制。怨:指杀生等恶行。善巧的人:以道的正见而善巧、明智。舍离恶:依各条道,对各自应当断除的恶法,逐一舍离、彻底断除。因此说“道已被宣说”。巴利
Dadatoti maggasahagatena alobhena sadevakassa lokassa abhayadānaṃ dadato. Puññanti lokuttarakusalaṃ. Saṃyamatoti maggapariyāpannehi sammāvācākammantājīvehi diṭṭhekaṭṭhādisaṃkilesato maggasaṃyamena saṃyamantassa. Veranti pāṇātipātādipāpaṃ. Kusaloti maggasammādiṭṭhiyā kusalo vicakkhaṇo. Jahāti pāpakanti tehi tehi maggehi taṃ taṃ pahātabbaṃ pāpadhammaṃ odhiso jahāti samucchindati. Tenāha ‘‘maggo vutto’’ti.
先前用“布施者”等话,没有区分地举出了善根;现在要加以区分,所以举出“世间善根”等。巴利
‘‘Dadato’’tiādinā pubbe avibhāgena kusalamūlāni uddhaṭānīti idāni vibhāgena tāni uddharanto ‘‘lokiyakusalamūla’’ntiādimāha.
凡夫地和有学地之所以被展示出来,是为了说明断除烦恼还没完成;无学地之所以被展示出来,是为了说明无余依般涅槃。巴利
Puthujjanabhūmi sekkhabhūmi dassitā pahānassa vippakatabhāvadīpanato. Asekkhabhūmi dassitā anupādāparinibbānadīpanato.
通往天界的行道,也就是前行道。巴利
Saggagāminī paṭipadā pubbabhāgappaṭipatti.
说到福德时,福德的果报其实也一并说到了,所以经文里说“布施者……说开示”。为了说明离开谛的业处就无法断除杂染,因此说“善巧者……说开示”。巴利
Puññe kathite puññaphalampi kathitameva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dadato…pe… desanamāhā’’ti. Saccakammaṭṭhānena vinā saṃkilesappahānaṃ natthīti dassento āha ‘‘kusalo…pe… desanamāhā’’ti.
怨这个词,也用在偷盗等恶法上,所以说:“同样地,一切学处都应详细解说。”两种解脱,即有学解脱和无学解脱,以及有余依解脱和无余依解脱。正如接下来要说的:“寂灭,就是两种涅槃界”等等。巴利
Verasaddo adinnādānādipāpadhammesupi niruḷhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sabbānipi sikkhāpadāni vitthāretabbānī’’ti. Dvepi vimuttiyo sekkhāsekkhavimuttiyo, saupādisesaanupādisesavimuttiyo ca. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nibbutoti dve nibbānadhātuyo’’tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 76).
以原因来比喻结果,或通过获取原因来获得结果,所以说“两种善趣”等等。轮回和还灭这两种成就,是这次开示所要说明的果;而布施、持戒、修习,是达成这个果的方法。“想要得到这两种成就的人,在布施等善行上不应该放逸”——这就是世尊在这里的教导。正是为了指出这个含义,才说“果等应当根据情况来了知”。巴利
Kāraṇūpacārena, kāraṇaggahaṇena vā phalaṃ gahitanti āha ‘‘dve sugatiyo’’tiādi. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭasampattiyo imissā desanāya phalaṃ, tassa dānaṃ sīlaṃ bhāvanā upāyo, ‘‘sampattidvayaṃ icchantena dānādīsu appamattena bhavitabba’’nti ayamettha bhagavato āṇattīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘phalādīni yathārahaṃ veditabbānī’’ti.
“简择”指的是抉择理趣会合,这里说的就是这个意思。接下来的内容,解说方式也一样。通过“三种施所成”等语句,显示了句义上的简择;借此,味等以及其余抉择理趣所摄的句义,都已在意义上被清晰辨析了。至于“舍离了色等所缘”这句,则说明它和前文的关联。“一切”:就是全部、毫无剩余,因为其作用已被完整表述了。巴利
Vicayoti vicayahārasampāto, so vuccatīti attho. Esa nayo ito paresupi. ‘‘Tividhampi dānamaya’’ntiādinā padatthavicayaṃ dasseti, tena assādādayo, itare ca vicayahārapadatthā atthato vicitā eva hontīti. Rūpādiārammaṇassa pariccāgo vuttoti sambandho. Sabboti sakalo anavasesato kiccassa vuttattā.
乐于布施的人,他的舍离决意会走向圆满,所以经文说“布施者……近因”。安住在离妄语和真实语中的人,他的真实决意会走向圆满,所以经文说“自制……近因”。由于与善巧相应以及断除恶法,智慧会走向圆满,所以经文说“善巧者……近因”。当贪等烦恼被无余地断除时,寂止就现前了,所以经文说“贪等……近因”。巴利
Dānābhiratassa cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dadato…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Viratisacce, vacīsacce ca tiṭṭhato saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṃyama…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kosallayogato ca pāpappahānato ca paññāpāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kusalo…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Anavasesarāgādīsu pahīnesu upasamo upaṭṭhito nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rāga…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
所谓“善巧”,是就补特伽罗来说的善巧正见,所以论中说:“善巧者……乃至……因为以道支等作为存在方式,所以具有同一相。”用“等”这个字,把菩提分法等层面的内容也一并收摄进来。“应当被耗尽的状态”,就是指应当被断除的状态。巴利
Kusaloti puggalādhiṭṭhānena kosallasammādiṭṭhi vuttāti āha ‘‘kusalo…pe… maggaṅgādibhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā’’ti. Ādisaddena bodhipakkhiyabhāvādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Khepetabbabhāvenāti pahātabbabhāvena.
“无怨”就是没有敌对。“以诸善法”是指没有过失的法,这里的意思是果与涅槃。对布施有大果报、由戒等功德而成为世尊无上应供处,以及无取著般涅槃——对这些的观察就是这布施的起因;这个道理在经文里本来就是确定下来的。词源和起因的关联是容易理解的,所以说“应当说明词源和起因的关联”。巴利
Averatanti asapattataṃ. Kusaladhammehīti anavajjadhammehi, phalanibbānehīti adhippāyo. Dānassa mahapphalatā, sīlādiguṇehi satthu anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvo, anupādāparinibbānanti imesaṃ paccavekkhaṇā imassa dānassa nidānanti ayamattho pāḷiyaṃ niruḷhova. Nibbacananidānasandhayo suviññeyyāvāti āha ‘‘nibbacananidānasandhayo vattabbā’’ti.
通过说明对立面来讲“集”,是为了教学。这里说的与悭吝等杂染同类的集,就是靠说明它的对立面来确定下来的。以无贪等……布施等法:凡是靠无贪等而生起布施等法的,那些无贪等本身就已经被“布施”等词涵盖进去了,所以注释书就判定这些是善根,说“这三样是善的”。“它们”指的就是这些善根。巴利
Paṭipakkhaniddesena samudayoti desanatthaṃ paṭipakkhaniddesanena niddhārito ayaṃ macchariyādisaṃkilesapakkhiko samudayo. Alobhena…pe… dānādīhīti yehi alobhādīhi dānādayo dhammā sambhavanti, tāni dānādiggahaṇeneva gahitānīti kusalamūlāni niddhāreti ‘‘imāni tīṇi kusalānī’’ti. Tesanti kusalamūlānaṃ.
因为害怕而给,是以送礼等方式来给。因为贪爱而给,是为了得到同类的东西。因为贪图利养而给,是以贿赂等方式来给。或者是出于悲悯,在悲悯的福田上给;出于恭敬,在功德田或恩惠田上给。因怖畏而退避,就是由于怖畏而退缩。通过这样的自制,确实不会积聚怨仇。如此,一切不善的果报都是恶的,应当这样结合起来理解。巴利
Bhayahetu deti paṇṇākārādivasena. Rāgahetu deti sabhāgavatthussa. Āmisakiñcikkhahetu deti lañjādivasena. Anukampanto vā karuṇākhette. Apacayamāno guṇakhette, upakārakhette vā. Bhayūparatoti bhayena orato. Tena tathārūpena saṃyamena veraṃ na ciyateva. Evaṃ sabbassa akusalassa pāpako vipākoti yojanā.
就像用“施予者”这类说法,通过否定布施来显示反转一样,同样也应该通过否定断除来显示反转,因此说:然而,不善者并不会舍弃。巴利
‘‘Dadato’’tiādinā yathā dānapaṭikkhepena parivattanaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ pahānapaṭikkhepenapi parivattanaṃ dassetabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘akusalo pana na jahātī’’ti.
相信业果,在布施的行为上努力,按照应当布施的方式去做,在这个过程中让正念现前、让心专注、以正见为先导,这样就是在布施上正确地行道。因此说:“布施即是……”。巴利
Kammaphalaṃ saddahanto dānakiriyāyaṃ padahanto yena vidhinā dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, tattha satiṃ upaṭṭhapento cittaṃ samādahanto sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkharonto dāne sammāpaṭipanno hotīti āha ‘‘dānaṃ nāma…pe… hotī’’ti.
在经文里,修习断除和安立这些内容,按照它们本身的样子就能直接理解。为了说明近因、同义词与安立,所以说了“那是戒的近因”等等,这很容易理解。另外,这里还有一些在义理上没有详细分别的内容,应该知道,它们既是因为按照已经说过的方式就能了解,也是因为含义本身就很浅显易懂。巴利
Bhāvanāpahānasamāropanāni pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato viññāyantīti padaṭṭhānavevacanasamāropanāni dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyaṃ. Aññañca yadettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ vuttanayattā, uttānatthattā cāti veditabbaṃ.